SCIENCE
                                                                                             Teacher Instruction Manual
                                                                                                    Chemistry & Physics
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                        Grade 10
                                                                                                          2007




                                                                                     Department of Science, Health & Physical Education
                                                                                              Faculty of Science &Technology
                                                                                               National Institute of Education
Science
                                                                                     Grade 10
                                                                                     Chemistry & Physics
                                                                                     2007
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     © National Institute of Education

                                                                                     ISBN-




                                                                                     Department of Science, Health & Physical Education,
                                                                                     Faculty of Science &Technology,
                                                                                     National Institute of Education.




                                                                                     Printing:
                                                                                     NIE Press,
                                                                                     National Institute of Education,
                                                                                     Maharagama.


                                                                                                                         i
Message of the Director General

The first curriculum revision for the new millennium is based on the elimination of the several
problems obtaining in the present education system. The present curriculum reforms have been
planned having identified the problems that youth face consequent to the weakening of their
thinking abilities, social abilities as well as personal abilities and step by step exploration of
factors leading to this situation, to overcome which, the necessary background was prepared.

Compared to the other countries in the Asian region, our country took the lead in education in
earlier years. But most countries in this region have superceded Sri Lanka in education today.
Some factors that influenced this deterioration are the action taken by educational institutions to
continue to take action to confirm the known, learn that which had been decided on earlier, and
reconstruct that which was, in the same form itself.

All these matters have been taken into consideration and the officers of the National Institute of
Education have endeavoured to prepare the new curriculum on the basis of a distinct philosophy.
The primary objective here is to change that which is known, explore that which is new and
develop that which is necessary for tomorrow and build up a generation of students who can
display their readiness for a successful future. But there is no need to reiterate, the need for a
visible change in the teacher’s role for the realization of this objective. In place of the obvious
transactional teacher role presenting in our classrooms so far, the Sri Lankan school teacher will
have to understand and conform to a student-centered, competency based and activity focused
transformational role.

It is our firm belief that this Teacher Instruction Manual will serve you as an aid to become an
effective teacher through the provision of numerous instructions that will help you adapt to the
new situation. Through the study of these instructions you will be provided the opportunity of
making your daily teaching as well as the evaluation task easy. There is no doubt that instructions
for student exploration and other quality inputs will help facilitate the teacher’s task. Similarly,
the Teacher Instruction Manual will help convey to school principals valuable information they
can use in time-tabling, sharing of limited resources and internal supervision.

My sincere thanks go to Dr. Mrs. I. L. Ginige, Assistant Director General (Curriculum
Development) Science & Technology Faculty of National Institute of Education for her direct
involvement in the preparation of this Teacher Instruction Manual that will serve an immense
purpose in the task performed at school level by the section above and also teacher educationist
involved in beginning or continuous teacher educational matters, in-service advisors as well as
officers at various levels, involved in external supervision plus monitoring programmes.

Professor J. W. Wickramasinghe
Director General
National Institute of Education
                                                 iii
Preface
        The first curriculum reform for the millennium implemented with the aim of preparing a
powerful basis for a new Sri Lanka anticipates a visible transformation of the teacher’s role. The
three main sections below are included in the Teacher Instruction Manual prepared with the
objective of providing the teacher with the necessary support in this regard.

       · Detailed Syllabus
       · Activity Continuum that helps in the implementation of the syllabus
       · Instruments for the extension of the learning teaching process.
       Teachers have been provided the opportunity of understanding several basic matters that
have been taken into consideration in the preparation of the curriculum for the detailed syllabus
extending beyond subject topics and sub-topics. Competency levels that correspond to subject
competency have been included in this section that commences with an introduction to the factors
and subject aims that formed the basis of the new syllabus. One special features of this section is
that, while the knowledge-base determined under competency level each student needs to develop
has been introduced as the subject content the multiple learning and teaching methods employed
in transmitting this section to the student has also been taken into consideration in determining the
time frame with respect to each competency level.
The final part of the detailed syllabus presented under the heading “School Policy and Programs”
needs to be studied very carefully and understood by every instructional leader. This section
provides school managers a range of valuable instructions to assist them in the allocation for
teaching, subject-teaching assigning functions to teachers, implementing co-curricular activities
as well as supervision of the teacher’s task. The second section of the Teacher Instruction Manual
has been prepared with the objective of providing teachers with clear understanding of the proposed
learning- teaching methodology. This section commences with the introduction of the methods of
planning activities under competency-based education as well as the change in the teacher’s role.
Although the activity continuum necessary for the implementation of the curriculum has been
introduced next, the implementation of the proposed activity in the very same manner is not
expected of teachers. The teacher should endeavor to make use of his / her creative, as well as
critical thinking abilities and adapt these activities in a manner that suits ones class, best. Although
instructions have been provided on the constitution of groups in keeping with the facets of the
problems subject to exploration, the teacher is expected to take an intelligent decision on the
number of groups based on number of students in the class.




                                                   iv
Time has been allocated for activities to ensure achievement of the relevant competency levels.
Therefore, teachers may have to exceed the 40-minute period. While each activity has been
provided adequate time for the actualization of each competency level, the teacher is expected
to make use of single or double periods in the time table and breakdown these activities, as
suitable in implementing them.
For the success of the procedure it is essential that every time an activity commenced the previous
day is carried over to the following day, that a brief summary of the part of the activity completed
the previous day is presented to the class. Similarly, this decision will provide the school community
with the opportunity of involving students in effective learning where teachers obtain leave of
absence.
The final item in this section is a list of quality inputs necessary for the maintenance of the quality
of subject learning and teaching, when taken as a whole. As such, the teacher has a choice of
ordering out the necessary learning-teaching materials in time and having them on hard.


Included in the third part of the teacher Instruction Manual under the title
“ Assessment and evaluation” are a number of important hints to ensure that the expected results
of the exercise are realized.


This section has been so structured as to introduce matters related to the assessment and evaluation
that should take place under each activity, extension of the learning and teaching that takes place
based on activity groups and the nature of the questions that might be expected in general
examinations. It must be pointed out that the primary responsibility of the teachers is to Identify
instances where assessment and evaluation can be implemented in the course of each activity
and to carry out this task successfully on the basis of common criteria. The set of instruments
prepared with a range of activities as the objective for the purpose of extending learning and
teaching provide students with the opportunity of involvement in continuous learning outside the
recommended classroom sessions. While it is the task of the teacher to regularly examine the
learning students receive, based on these instruments, and encourage them, arriving at a correct
decision regarding the final results of the activities and communicating that decision to the relevant
parties is expected of the teacher. It is essential that a visible change takes place in general
examinations for the success of the learning-teaching process. The National Institute of Education,
with the assistance of the Sri-Lanka Department of Examinations, has introduced several prototype
questions for educational levels that terminate with these examinations. Since this change in
examination question papers has been suggested in order to direct students to learn through
practice and experience, instead of resorting to mechanical approaches like memorizing or
answering model question papers, the education of school students and parents about this change
should commence at the beginning itself.
                                                     v
All teachers should realize that various activities can be developed for the achievement of any
particular competency level. Accordingly, they should be prepared for more successful teaching
through the use of better approaches, exploration, as well as instruments for the extension of
learning and teaching.
The present Teacher Instruction Manual will give teachers right throughout the country the courage
to effect a visible change in the teacher’s role and prevent their becoming inactive in the presence
of new approaches. Similarly, we expect to award certificates and provide numerous development
opportunities to teachers who go beyond the activities to involve themselves in the innovation of
novel creations. What teachers have to do order in to become eligible to the awards is to improve
these activities, using their creative thinking, and present them. Learning-teaching plans prepared
in this manner outside the basic activity plan, should be forwarded to Assistant Director General
( Curriculum Development ), Science and Technology faculty, National Institute of Education,
Sri Lanka. Selection of those entitled to awards will be made subsequent to the study of these
activities by the relevant subject committees.
We have endeavoured in this manner, to bring learning-teaching assessment and evaluation on to
the same platform through new methodologies. According to this, teachers will be provided
substantial latitude to meaningfully handle the learning-teaching process, school-based assessment,
as well as assignment of home-work. It is our firm conviction that the school system of Sri Lanka
will, make maximum use of this aid and depart from orthodox learning-teaching approaches to
enhance the thinking abilities, social abilities as well as the individual abilities of the sons and
daughters of the county.


Dr. Indira Lilamani Ginige
Assistant Director General (Curriculum Development),
Faculty of Science and Technology ,
National Institute of Education,
Sri Lanka.




                                                 vi
Direction:       Prof. J W Wickremasinghe - Director General


Guidance:        Dr. I. L. Ginige
                 Assistant Director General
                 Faculty of Science and Technology
                 National Institute of Education


Supervision :    Mr. C M R Anthony
                 Director
                 Department of Science, Health & Physical Education


Instructional leadership, Co-ordination and Editing :
                 Mr. C M R Anthony                   -       Director
                 Mr. G H Gauthamadasa                -       Chief Project Officer
                 Mr. W A D Rathnasuriya              -       Chief Project Officer
                 Mr. W A Sumathipala                 -       Project Officer
                 Ms.J Athamlebbe                     -       Project Officer
                 Mr. A D A de Silva                  -       Project Officer
                 Mr. L K Waduge                      -       Project Officer
                 Mr. P Malavipathirana               -       Project Officer
                 Ms. Nadee Ama Jayasekera            -      Project Officer
                 Ms. H M Mapagunaratne               -       Asst. Project Officer




Translation                  :        Mr. R.B.A.Jayasekara
Computer page setting        :        Mr. K.Wimalasena, Mahinda College, Galle.
Art                          :        Ms. U L N Fernando
                                      Teacher Service,
                                      Sirimavo Bandaranayake BV. Colombo.07.
Cover page and pictures      :        Master. Soraj Dhananjaya Kolonne,
                                      Grade 11, Thurstan College, Colombo.




                                            vii
Contents

                                                                                                                                      Page
                                                                                     ² Director General’s Message                      iii

                                                                                     ² Preface                                         iv

                                                                                     ² Contributors                                     vi

                                                                                     ² Contents                                       vii

                                                                                     ² School Policies and Progammes                   15

                                                                                     · Learning-Teaching Methodology
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                       ² Introduction                               18-20

                                                                                       ² Quality Inputs                                21

                                                                                       ² Activity Continuum                        22-114

                                                                                     · Assessment and Evaluation

                                                                                       ² Introduction                             117-118

                                                                                       ² Tools for Extended Learning              119 -124

                                                                                       ² Prototype Questions                      125 -129




                                                                                                                           viii
Competency             1.0 ( Investigates Scientific findings about
                                                                                                                  structure of matter and quantity

                                                                                     Competency level       1.1( Discuss the scientific findings about the structure of
                                                                                                                 atom.
                                                                                     Activity             1.1 ( Let us go inside the atom.
                                                                                     Time                      ( 120 minutes
                                                                                     Quality inputs            ( ² Photograph of a nuclear reactor.annex 1.1.1
                                                                                                                 ² Three copies of instructions for exploration given in
                                                                                                                    annex 1.1.2
                                                                                     •                           ² Three copies of the article"Let us get inside
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                    the atom"annex 1.1.3
                                                                                                                 ² Demy papers and pastels
                                                                                     Teaching-learning process (
                                                                                     Step       1.1.1          ( ² Display the photograph to the class.
                                                                                                                 ² Inquire from the children as to what know about what is
                                                                                                                    given in the picture
                                                                                                                 ² Conduct a brain storming discussion to highlight the
                                                                                                                    following.
                                                                                                                    That,
                                                                                                                    ² In an atomic reactor,the energy in the atoms is
                                                                                                                        transformed into energy that is useful to man.
                                                                                                                    ² atom is the building blocks of matter.
                                                                                                                    ² The findings about the atom can be made use of for the
                                                                                                                        benefit of man.
                                                                                                                                                                  (15 minutes)
                                                                                     Step       1.1.2          ( ² Divide the class into three groups.
                                                                                                                 ² Provide the groups with copies of instructions for
                                                                                                                    exploration.
                                                                                                                 ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration.
                                                                                                                 ² Prepare them to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                                                                                    (60 minutes)
                                                                                     Step       1.1.3          ( ² Get each group to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                                 ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to
                                                                                                                    elaborate on the presentation.
                                                                                                                 ² Get the other groups to propose constructive sugges
                                                                                                                        tions,
                                                                                                                 ² Elaborate highlighting the following points.


                                                                                                                         9
That,
                                                                                     ² Atom is a particle with a small mass.
                                                                                     ² Fundamental sub atomic paticles inclued in an atom
                                                                                       are electrons,protons and neutrons.
                                                                                     ² Out of the paticles the lightest particle is the
                                                                                       electron.
                                                                                     ² mass of an electron is about 9.1095x 10-31 kg
                                                                                     ² electron is a particle with a negative charge.
                                                                                     ² Scientists J.J Thompson,Millikan Cotributed to the
                                                                                       fundamental studies about the electron .
                                                                                     ² Proton is a partical having a mass of about 1840
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                       times the mass of an electron.
                                                                                     ² Mass of a proton is about 1.6725x10-31kg
                                                                                     ² Proton is a particle with a positive charge.
                                                                                     ² Proton is symbolised as 11p
                                                                                     ² Ernest Rutherford contributed to the fundamental
                                                                                       studies about the proton.
                                                                                     ² Neutron is a partical which has a mass almost equal
                                                                                       to that of a proton.
                                                                                     ² Mass of a neutron is about 1.6750x10-20 kg.
                                                                                     ² Neutron is a particle with no charge,it is neutral.
                                                                                     ² Neutron is symbolised as 10n
                                                                                     ² The number of electron or the number of protons in
                                                                                       an atom of an element is identical to that element.
                                                                                     ² According to J.J Thompasons"Plum pudding "model
                                                                                       he stated that an atom is a sphere which is positively
                                                                                       charged,and the electrons which are negatively
                                                                                       charged are embeded in it.
                                                                                     ² According to Rutherford solar model the protons,and
                                                                                       neutrons are collected at the centre which is the
                                                                                       nucleus and the electrons are moving in orbits around
                                                                                       it.
                                                                                     ² These shells are named as K.L.M.N from centre
                                                                                       out wards



                                                                                                                       (45 mts)


                                                                                     10
Criteria for assessment and evaluation
                                                                                     ² Names and describe the fundamental sub atomic particles.
                                                                                     ² Appreciates that scientists have contributed to the findings about the atomic structure.
                                                                                     ² Compare different atomic models.
                                                                                     ² Collect data about scientific discoveries using references.
                                                                                     ² Present fact in an alternative way.
                                                                                                                                                              Annex 1.1.1
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                                                                          a




                                                                                                                           11
Annex 1.1.2
                                                                                                                     Instructions for group exploration
                                                                                     ² Given below are three types of sub atomic particles in an atom.
                                                                                                    ²         Electron
                                                                                                    ²         Proton
                                                                                                    ²         Neutron
                                                                                     ² Focus your attention on the sub atomic particle relevant to you.
                                                                                     ² With reference to the reading material provided to you discuss the follwing about the sub
                                                                                       atomic particle relevant toyou.
                                                                                                        ² It`s discovery
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                        ² Properties
                                                                                                        ² How it is placed in the atom according to different atomic models.
                                                                                     ² Be prepared to present your findings to the class.
                                                                                                                                                                        Annex 1.1.3
                                                                                                                         Let us go inside the atom
                                                                                                    Atom is derived from the Greek word "atomos" which means ,not divisible further
                                                                                     but later it was discovered that it is made up sub atomic particles.Although there are many Sub
                                                                                     atomic particles only three important particles are mentioned below.
                                                                                     1&             Electron
                                                                                                    In the middle of the nineteenth century Scientists drew their attention whether
                                                                                     it is possible to conduct through gases
                                                                                                    In 1875 B.C Crooks observed that in a closed glass tube with ends having two
                                                                                     electrodes and a high voltage is applied and in the meantime the air pressure inside to tube is
                                                                                     gradually reduced,there is a glow near the cathode.Further he noticed that if the air pressure is
                                                                                     further reduced this glow gradually move from the cathode towards the anode,and that there is
                                                                                     a"shadow" between the cathode and the anode.When the pressure inside the tube is about 1
                                                                                     pascall he noticed that the shadow got distributed throughout the tube and that there is an
                                                                                     emission of a beam of rays from the cathode to the anode.Since these rays were emitted from
                                                                                     the cathode they were named as cathode rays by crooks.This set up is called the cathode ray
                                                                                     tube.
                                                                                                    In (1858BC-1940BC) J.J.Thompson conducted further experiments with these
                                                                                     rays,As a result of these experiments following conclusions were arrived at about the prop-
                                                                                     erties of cathode rays.

                                                                                                  1        Cathode rays move in straight lines.
                                                                                                  2        They are negatively charged
                                                                                                  3        They are made up of particles having a mass.

                                                                                                                          12
J.J.Thompson conducted an experiment to determine the (e/m ) ratio of the cathode ray
                                                                                     particales, where (e) is the charge and (m) is the mass.
                                                                                     The value he got for e/m was very large
                                                                                                           e/m=1.76x10 c kg-1
                                                                                     The values obtained for e/m ratio for the cathode rays using different gases and different cath-
                                                                                     odes is the same.By this Thompson concluded that the cathode rays consists of the same
                                                                                     particles.Further Thompson stated that,the fundamental unit of electricity,the electron introduced
                                                                                     by J.J. Stony in 1874 B.C.is the negatively charge particles in the cathode rays.
                                                                                     Electron is a common sub atomic particle present in all atoms.
                                                                                                    Charge of an electron = 1.602x10-19 C
                                                                                                    Mass of an electron = 9.1095x10-31 kg
                                                                                     At present different forms of cathode ray tubes are used in various electronic instruments.
                                                                                     Some of these are TV photo tube,Computer monitor,Cathode ray Oscilloscope,
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     Fluorescent tube


                                                                                                                              High Voltage




                                                                                                  Cathode                                                  Anode

                                                                                                                                   To Vaccum Pump


                                                                                                            Simple Cathode Ray Emitting Tube


                                                                                     Proton

                                                                                     In 1886 B.C. E.Goldstien observed that when using a porous Cathode,is subjected to a voltage
                                                                                     from 20,000V to 50,000V some special rays were seen to emit from the pores in the Cathode in
                                                                                     a direction opposite to the Cathode rays.He named them as positive rays.
                                                                                     When ratio e/m was calculated for the particles in these positive rays it was found that the value
                                                                                     is numerically smaller to that of the particles in the cathode rays.

                                                                                     When different gases were used in the Cathode ray tube the e/m ratio for the particles in the
                                                                                     possitive rays were found to be whole numerical multiples of the e/m ratio for the particles in the
                                                                                     possitive rays.When Hydrogen gas is used in the cathode ray tube.In short the lightest possitive
                                                                                     rays particles were obtained from Hydrogen.In 1871 B.C-!937B.C Rutherford,named this lightest
                                                                                     possitive ray particle as proton and also that it should be the common possitively charged funda-
                                                                                     mental particle of all matter.
                                                                                             Charge of a proton=1.602x10-19C
                                                                                             Mass of a proton=1.6726x10-27 Kg
                                                                                        Mass of a proton is 1840 times the mass of an electron.
                                                                                                                            13
High Voltage




                                                                   Anode
                Cathode with a slit
                          production of possitive rays


Neutron

Possitively charged particles named α particles are emitted from radio active sources.When
  fall on to the instrument to detect charged particals, it causes a deflection.(Fig. a)
In 1932 James Chadwick conducted an experiment form which it was founded that when a
thin Berylium sheet was place in between the radio active source and the detector no deflection
was seen ( Fig. b)
When a paraffin sheet was place between the Berylium sheet and the detector tere was a
                                                 α
deflection. (Fig. c)
                      Source of
                                                              Detector
                      particals
                                                                          Shows deflection
       (a)                                                                Possitive charge
                                                                          particals fall on
                                                                          detector
                           Berylium plate
                                                                        No deflection is
                                                                        shown
       (b)
                                                                        charged particals are
                                                                        not falling on the
                            Berylium plate           Paraffin wax plate detector
                                                                         Shows a deflection
       (c)                                                               charged particals
                                                                         fall on the detector

                        particals     Chargeless Neutrons Particals with possitive charge


       (d)


                                      14
Chadwick showed that when α Particles strikes the beryllium sheet it releases particles which
                                                                                         has no charge.When these particles strikes the paraffin sheet,it releases charged particles and
                                                                                         as a result there is a deflection in the detector.(Figd)

                                                                                         He also found that when particles strikes the beryllium sheet,the uncharged particles emitted
                                                                                         from it has a mass equal to that of the Hydrogen atom. He stated that these particles are another
                                                                                         type of sub atomic particles and named them as neutrons.
                                                                                                   mass of a neutron = 1.6750x10-27 kg




                                                                                                                Thompsons` Atomic Model(Plum pudding model)
    Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                                         α


                                                                                                                Rutherford`s model of the atom(Solar model)

s                                                                                        Using      rays emitted by radioactive material,in 1911 Geiger and Marsden conducted an
                                                                                         experiment to find the στρucture of matter under the direction of Rutheford.Here a beam of
                                                                                             particles was obtained using radio active polonium kept in a lead chamber with a slit.In this
                                                                                         experiment a thin gold foil was bombarded with particles.They kept a screen painted with Zinc
                                                                                         sulphide to detect the direction in which the particles move.There was a glow when
                                                                                             particles struck the Zinc sulphide sheet.
                                                                                                                                Rutherford's gold leaf experiment
                                                                                                     Source of Polonium

                                                                                                                                                                          Zinc Sulphide
                                                                                                                                                                          screen which
                                                                                                                                                                          could move
                                                                                                                                                                          around the
                                                                                                                                                                          gold leaf
                                                                                                                     Thin gold leaf
                                                                                                  Led block with the hole



                                                                                                                               15
In this experiment it was discovered that most of the Alpha particals went through the gold foil
                                                                                     without any deviation, a small number of Alpha particals deviated when going through the gold
                                                                                     foil and a very small number were reflected. The reason why most of the Alpha particals went
                                                                                     through without any difficulty was because according to Rutherford a major part of an atom is
                                                                                     empty space.




                                                                                                                                                               Atom

                                                                                        α particals                                                            Nucleis
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                                                               particals not diverging


                                                                                     Reflected   particals                                                       particals diverging




                                                                                                      Model to explain the results of Rutherfords experiment

                                                                                                                                     α
                                                                                     Further according to Rutherford possitively charged particles some deviated and some reflected
                                                                                     because there are small areas inside atom where possitive charges are collected together.These
                                                                                     possitively charged areas he called nucleui.Later Rutherford Put forward a theory according
                                                                                     which he says,electrons are revolving in circular orbits around the nucleus,like the planets are
                                                                                     revolving round the sun.




                                                                                                                                                               electron

                                                                                                       nucleus




                                                                                                                                                               path




                                                                                                                           16
Competency            1.0 ( Investigates Scientific findings about
                                                                                                                 structure of matter and quantity

                                                                                     Competency level      1.2 ( Use Scientific Conventions to highlight diversity in
                                                                                                                 atoms
                                                                                     Activity             1.2 ( Let us Investigates about atoms, make models, study about
                                                                                                                 diversity.
                                                                                     Time                      ( 120 minutes
                                                                                     Quality inputs            ( ² Poster showing the planetary modle structure of Helium
                                                                                                                    and Sodium included in annex 1.2.1
                                                                                                                 ² Four copies of instructions for exploration given in
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                    annex 1.1.2
                                                                                                                 ² Four copies of the article"Looking at an atom with an
                                                                                                                    exploratory eye", included in annex 1.2.3
                                                                                                                 ² Beads of three colours or small rigifoam balls.,bucket
                                                                                                                    wires,gum,ekle and thread
                                                                                                                 ² Demy papers and pastels
                                                                                     Teaching-learning process (
                                                                                     Step       1.21           ( ² Display to the class the poster showing the structure of
                                                                                                                        Helium and Sodium atoms.
                                                                                                                    ²   Conduct a brain storming session to highlight the
                                                                                                                        following.facts.
                                                                                                                        That,
                                                                                                                    ²   The shells in an atom from nucleus outwards are named
                                                                                                                        K, L, M, N
                                                                                                                    ²   Helium atom has two electrons in the K shell
                                                                                                                        Sodium atom has K, L, M, Shells with 2,8,1 electrons
                                                                                                                        respectively.
                                                                                     •                              ²   The highest number of electrons K,L,M,N shells could
                                                                                                                        have is 2, 8, 8,18
                                                                                                                    ²   The arrangement of electrons in the shells around the nucleus
                                                                                                                        of an atom is called electronic configuration
                                                                                                                    ²   The electronic configuration of an atom is one
                                                                                                                        convention which indicate the identify of an atom.
                                                                                                                                                             (15 minutes)




                                                                                                                         17
² Provide the class with copies of instructions for
                                                                                                        exploration.material for making models,the letter,demy
                                                                                                        paper and pastel
                                                                                                      ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration.
                                                                                                      ² Prepare them to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                                                                       (60 minutes)
                                                                                     Step   1.2.3   ( ² Get each group to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                      ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to
                                                                                                        elaborate on the presentation.
                                                                                                      ² Get the other groups to propose constructive sugges
                                                                                                           tions,
                                                                                                      ² Elaborate highlighting the following points.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                        That,
                                                                                                        ² In Chemistry there are 110 elements discovered at
                                                                                                           present.
                                                                                                        ² Every elements is symbolized using the letters in the
                                                                                                           English Alphabet.

                                                                                                          ² Atomic number is the number of protons in the
                                                                                                            nucleus of the atom.

                                                                                                          ² In a neutral atom the number of electrons(-
                                                                                                             charges)and the number of protons (+chargs) are
                                                                                                             equal.
                                                                                                          ² In the atomic nucleus both types of sub atomic
                                                                                                             particles,protons and neutrons are present.
                                                                                                          ² In an element the number of protons is constant. But
                                                                                                            there are atoms with varying number of neutrons.
                                                                                                          ² The total number of Protons and neutrons in the
                                                                                                            nucleus of the atom is called the mass number or the
                                                                                                            number of nucleons.
                                                                                                          ² Atoms of an element having identical number of
                                                                                                            protons but different number of neutrons the mass
                                                                                                            number varies.These atoms are called isotopes.
                                                                                                          ² In a chemical symbol of an atom on the top left side is
                                                                                                            the mass number and at bottom is the atomic
                                                                                                            number. ( 12C )
                                                                                                                        6

                                                                                                          ² The relative mass of an atom is the number of times
                                                                                                            the mass of the atom relative to 1/12 of the mass of
                                                                                                            12
                                                                                                             6C
                                                                                                                 isotope atom.

                                                                                                           18
² Relative atomic mass=mass of an atom of an element/massof
                                                                                                                12
                                                                                                                 6C
                                                                                                                    isotope atomx 1/12
                                                                                                                                                            (45 minuts)


                                                                                                                 Criteria for assessment and Evaluation
                                                                                     ² Names and describe conventions related to identification of elements.
                                                                                     ² Appreciates that diversity of matter is built on diversity of atoms.
                                                                                     ² Contruct models to show the structure of atoms.
                                                                                     ² Show diversity by using Symbols.
                                                                                     ² Discover facts using various Sources.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                             Arrangement of sub - Atomic particals in Helium and Sodium
                                                                                       He Atom
                                                                                                     ²
                                                                                                                 K Shell             Electronic configuration   2
                                                                                                     ²



                                                                                        Na Atom

                                                                                                         ²                 K Shell
                                                                                                         ²²
                                                                                                          ²
                                                                                                   ²            ²
                                                                                                                ²
                                                                                                                           L Shell
                                                                                                   ²                       M Shell
                                                                                                         ²
                                                                                                         ²²                              Electronic configuration 2" 8" 1




                                                                                                                           19
Annex 1.2.2

                                                                                                                     Instructions for group exploration

                                                                                     ² Focus your attention to the six atoms assigned to your group, according to the table given
                                                                                      below.
                                                                                                                          Data of some atoms


                                                                                         Symbol     A B C D E F G H I J K L MNO P QR S T UV WX
                                                                                       (not the
                                                                                       standard )
                                                                                        Number of
                                                                                        Protons     1 4 1 12 17 19 2 6 7 13 6 18 3 8 11 8 15 20 5 9 10 14 10 16
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                       Number of 1 4 1 12 17 19 2 6 7 13 6 18 3 8 11 8 15 20 5 9 10 14 10 16
                                                                                       Electrons

                                                                                       Number of 1 5 2 12 18 20 2 6 7 14 7 22 4 8 12 9 16 20 6 10 10 1412 16
                                                                                       Neutrons


                                                                                                      Group i           Group ii            Group iii         Group iv


                                                                                     ² Using data given in the table and the artical " Looking at the atom with an exploratory eye"
                                                                                      find the standard chemical symbols to the elements provided to you.
                                                                                     ² Find the atomic mass and mass number of the atoms provided to you by using the types of
                                                                                      sub atomic particals and their numbers.
                                                                                     ² Develope the eletronic configuration of the respective elements by writing the number of
                                                                                       eletrons in the cells from closer to the nucleus outwards.
                                                                                     ² Develope using the letter discuss about isotopes and relative atomic mass and find out the
                                                                                       facts.
                                                                                     ² Select necessary item from the common table and construct solar models of atoms allocated
                                                                                      to you.
                                                                                     ² Be prepared to present constructions and findings to the class.




                                                                                                                           20
Annex 1.2.3

                                                                                                                  "Looking at an atom with an exploratory eye"

                                                                                      Do you know that all matter solids, liquids and gases found in your environment is formed by
                                                                                     110 elements getting grouped together in different ways ?
                                                                                     Each of these elements are formed from building units called atoms.Although it is not possible to
                                                                                     look at an Atom or its interior using the naked eye, the way the scientists by performing varius
                                                                                     experiments have been able to learn about the structure of these is amazing. To begin with let us
                                                                                     find about the sub atomic particals of atoms.

                                                                                                                        Sub Atomic Particals

                                                                                              Element              Symbol      Number of        Number of          Num,ber of
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                               Electrons        Protons            Neutrons

                                                                                              Hydrogen             H               1                1                  --
                                                                                              Helium               He              2                2                  2
                                                                                              Lithium              Li              3                3                  4
                                                                                              Berelium             Be              4                4                  5
                                                                                              Boron                B               5                5                  6
                                                                                              Carbon               C               6                6                  6
                                                                                              Nitrogen             N               7                7                  7
                                                                                              Oxygen               O               8                8                  8
                                                                                              Fluorine             F               9                9                  10
                                                                                              Neon                 Ne              10               10                 10
                                                                                              Sodium               Na              11               11                 12
                                                                                              Magnesium            Mg              12               12                 12
                                                                                              Aluminium            Al              13               13                 14
                                                                                              Silicon              Si              14               14                 14
                                                                                              Phosparous           P               15               15                 15
                                                                                              Sulphur              S               16               16                 16
                                                                                              Chlorine             Cl              17               17                 18
                                                                                              Argon                Ar              18               18                 22
                                                                                              Potasium             K               19               19                 20
                                                                                              Calcium              Ca              20               20                 20



                                                                                     Every element has a chemical symbol denoted by letters in the English alphabet. For easy study
                                                                                     it is possible to arrange the number of ptotons in the atomic nucleus of all the elements found in
                                                                                     the world. Now let us find out some theories about atoms.




                                                                                                                            21
Data of Elements of atomic numbers 1 - 20


                                                                                                                       Number of Electrons in the
                                                                                     Name of     Chemical   Atomoc     shells                           Mass Relative
                                                                                     Element     Symbol     Number     (Electronic configuration)       number Atomic
                                                                                                                                                               mass
                                                                                                                           K        L     M         N
                                                                                     Hydrogen    H           1         1                                 1      1
                                                                                     Helium      He          2         2                                 4      4
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     Lithium     Li          3         2        1                        7      6'9
                                                                                     Beralium    Be          4         2        2                        9      9
                                                                                     Boron       B           5         2        3                        11     10'8
                                                                                     Carbon      C           6         2        4                        12     12
                                                                                     Nitrogen    N           7         2        5                        14     14
                                                                                     Oxygen      O           8         2        6                        16     16
                                                                                     Fluvorin    F           9         2        7                        19     19
                                                                                     Neon        Ne          10        2        8                        20     20'2
                                                                                     Sodium      Na          11        2        8         1              23     23
                                                                                     Magnisium   Mg          12        2        8         2              24     24'3
                                                                                     Aluminium   Al          13        2        8         3              27     27
                                                                                     Silicon     Si          14        2        8         4              28     28'1
                                                                                     Phosporus   P           15        2        8         5              31     31
                                                                                     Sulphur     S           16        2        8         6              32     32'1
                                                                                     Clorine     Cl          17        2        8         7              35     35'5
                                                                                     Argon       Ar          18        2        8         8              40     40
                                                                                     Potasium    K           19        2        8         8         1    39     39'1
                                                                                     Calsium     Ca          20        2        8         8         2    40     40'1




                                                                                                                  22
Atomic Number
The atomic number of an element is the number of protons in the atom of that element.(In a
neutral atom the number of protons in the nucleus is equal to the number of electrons in the
shells.)

Mass number
The mass number of an element is the sum of the protons and neutrons in the atomic nucleus
of that element,


Relative atomic Mass
You could understand that atoms are particles having a very small mass hence it is not useful
in Chemistry to use the international unit of mass,the kilogram in relation to the mass of an
atom. Hence the mass of an atom is stated as a relative value of a standard unit.It is called the
Relative atomic mass unit.
                                         12
Relative atomic mass Unit = mass of       6 C Isotope atom
                                            12

The relative atomic mass of an atom is the number of times the mass of that atom in relation to
the relative atomic mass unit.It could be stated as

Relative atomic mass      = mass of an atom
                           atomic mass unit
Relative atomic mass      = mass of an atom of an element
                                                      12
                             mass of an atom of        6   C isotope x 1/12

There are differences between the atoms of the same element.An example of this is the presence
of atoms of elements with same number of protons but with different number of neutrons,Such
elements where the number of protons in the atomic nucleus is the same but the number of
neutrons vary,and as a result they vary in their mass number.These are called isotopes.

A Symbol is used to identify an atom.In an atomic symbol at the top left is the mass number
                                            12
and at the bottom is the atomic number(      6   C)




                                       23
Annex 1.2.6
     Data about some of the isotopes found in nature of some elements

Name of    Atomic       Mass       Symbol of Number of   Number of Number of
element    number       number     the isotope protons   Neutrons Electrons
                                               in the    in the    in the
                                               nucleus   nucleus   nucleus
Hydrogen      1          1            1
                                          H        1      0           1
                                      1

              1          2            2
                                      1   H        1      1           1
              1          3            3
                                      1   H        1      2           1

                                     3
Helium        2          3           2   He        2      1           2
              2          4           4
                                     2   He        2      2           2


Lithium       3          6            6
                                      3   Li       3      3           3
              3          7            7
                                          Li       3      4           3
                                      3


                                      10
Boron         5          10            5   B       5      5           5
              5          11           11
                                       5   B       5      6           5


Carbon        6          12           12
                                       6   C       6      6           6
              6          13           13
                                           C       6      7           6
                                       6


                                      14
Nitrogen      7          14            7   N       7      7           7
              7          15           15
                                       7   N       7      8           7

                                          16
Oxygen        8          16                8   O   8      8           8
                                          17
              8          17                8   O   8      9           8
              8          18               18
                                           8   O   8      10          8

                                      20
Neon          10         20           10   Ne      10     10          10
                                      21
              10         22           10   Ne      10     11          10
              10         22           22
                                      10   Ne      10     12          10


Sulpher       16         32           32
                                           S       16     16          16
                                      16
              16         33           33
                                           S       16     17          16
                                      16
              16         34           34
                                           S       16     18          16
                                      16



                              24
Chlorine   17   35        35
                               Cl   17   18   17
                          17
           17   37        37
                               Cl   17   20   17
                          17

                          39
Potasium   19   39        19   K    19   20   19
           19   40        40
                          19   K    19   21   19
           19   41        41
                          19   K    19   22   19

                          40
           20   40             Ca   20   20   20
Calcium                   20
                          42
           20   42        20   Ca   20   22   20
                          43
           20   43        20   Ca   20   23   20
                          44
           20   44        20   Ca   20   24   20
                          46
           20   46        20   Ca   20   26   20
                          48
           20   48        20   Ca   20   28   20




                     25
Competency            1.0 ( Investigates Scientific findings about the structure
                                                                                                                 of matter and quantity.


                                                                                     Competency level      1.3   ( Explain the Properties of compounds using it`s bonds.
                                                                                     Activity              1.3   ( Let us Investigates the Properties of compounds using it`s
                                                                                                                   bonds.
                                                                                     Time                        ( 120 minutes
                                                                                     Quality inputs              ( ² Atomic models arranged according to instructions in
                                                                                                                      annex 1.3.1
                                                                                                                   ² Two copies of instructions for exploration given in
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                      annex 1.3.2
                                                                                                                   ² Two work stations arranged according to instructions
                                                                                                                      given in annexe 1.3.3
                                                                                                                 ² Two copies of the article "Chemical bonds" given in
                                                                                                                      annex 1.3.4
                                                                                                                   ² Demy papers and pastels


                                                                                     Teaching-learning process (
                                                                                     Step       1.3.1        (   ² Join the atomic models accordingly with the help of the
                                                                                                                   students.
                                                                                                                 ² Lead a discussion highlighting the following points.
                                                                                                                   ² Bonds are formed between atoms by the electron.
                                                                                                                   ² Two electrons join to form a bond between two
                                                                                                                       atoms.
                                                                                                                   ² When a chemical bond is formed ,the atoms that go to
                                                                                                                       form the bond behave the following fashion.
                                                                                                                   ² One atom donates an electron from its last energy
                                                                                                                     level to the other atom.
                                                                                                                   ² The election donated by one atom is accepted by the
                                                                                                                       other atom.
                                                                                                                   ² The positive ion formed by the donation of the eletron
                                                                                                                       and the negative ion formed by the acceptance of
                                                                                                                       electron are attracted.
                                                                                                                   ² When there is no formation of ions,electron pairs are
                                                                                                                       shared between two atoms
                                                                                                                   ² During the formation of bonds the atoms try to
                                                                                                                       achieve the maximum inert gas configuration.
.
                                                                                                        ² An atom reach the maximum nobel gas configuration by
                                                                                                          forming one or more bonds.
                                                                                                      ² Molecules are formed by atoms joining together by
                                                                                                           chemical bonds.
                                                                                                      ² A molecules consists of two or more atoms which may be
                                                                                                           homogeneous or heterogeneous.
                                                                                                        ² When chemical bonds form between heterogeneous atoms
                                                                                                          compounds are formed.
                                                                                                        ² It is possible to develop the chemical equation of a com
                                                                                                          pound by indicating the different number of atoms in a
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                          compound molecule using the symbols of elements.
                                                                                                                                                         (15 mts)

                                                                                     Step   1.3.2   : ² Divide the class into two groups.
                                                                                                      ² Provide the groups with instruction for exploration the
                                                                                                         article,demy papers and pastel.
                                                                                                     ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration.
                                                                                                      ² Prepare them to present their findings to the whole class.
                                                                                                                                                          (60 mts)

                                                                                     Step   1.1.3      (² Get each group to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                       ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to
                                                                                                          elaborate on the presentation.
                                                                                                       ² Get the other groups to propose constructive suggestions,
                                                                                                       ² Elaborate highlighting the following points.
                                                                                                       That,
                                                                                                          ² Atoms of elements by releasing electrons become positive
                                                                                                             ions,and by receiving electrons become negative ions.
                                                                                                          ² The positive ions are named cations and the negative ions as
                                                                                                             anions.
                                                                                                          ² There are ions which are formed from a single atom or from
                                                                                                             a number of atoms.
                                                                                                          ² Oppositely charged ions are attracted together and thereby
                                                                                                             forming ionic bonds,
                                                                                                          ² When ions get together to form a compound,the arrange
                                                                                                             ment of ions in space is called the ionic lattice.
² The ionic compounds have the following inherent properties.
                                                                                     ² Solid crystalline substances made up of ions.
                                                                                        ² Have high melting points and boiling points.
                                                                                        ² Soluable in polar liquids.
                                                                                        ² Conducts electricity in the fused state as well as in solution.
                                                                                     ² A molecule is a unit formed by the union of more than one
                                                                                       atom of similar or dissimilar elements.
                                                                                     ² Atoms of some elements in the solid state are arranged in a
                                                                                       definite pattern in space.
                                                                                     ² The structures which are formed by the arrangement of atoms
                                                                                       of elements in a definite pattern are called atomic lattice.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     ² Some compound molecules,in the solid state,are arranged in
                                                                                       a definite pattern in space.
                                                                                     ² The structures formed by the arrangement of compound
                                                                                       molecules in a definite pattern in space are known as molecular
                                                                                       lattice.
                                                                                     ² When bonds are formed the presence of electrons are
                                                                                        indicated by a dottod cross.
                                                                                     ² A single bond between two atom is indicated by a short line
                                                                                       in between them.
                                                                                     ² Depending on the number of electron pair which go to from
                                                                                       the bond,the bonds are known as single bond,double bond or a
                                                                                       triple bond.
                                                                                     ² The electron pairs in the valency orbit that do not take part in
                                                                                       the formation of bonds are called lone electron pairs.
                                                                                     ² The compounds which are formed by covalent bonds have the
                                                                                       following properties.
                                                                                       ² Mostly occur as neutral molecules made up of a number
                                                                                           of atoms.
                                                                                       ² Occur in Solid,liquid,and gaseous state.
                                                                                       ² Most compounds have low melting points and boiling
                                                                                           points.
                                                                                       ² Some are soluble in water.
                                                                                       ² Do not conduct electricity in aqueous solution.
                                                                                     ² The ability of an element to combine or its combining power is
                                                                                       called valency.
                                                                                     ² The number of electrons of an atom of an element that take
                                                                                       part in the bonds is equal to its valency.
                                                                                     ² Ions as well as radicals have a valency.
                                                                                                                                      (45 mts.)
Criteria for Assessment and evaluation :
                                                                                                             ² Explain how ionic and covalent bonds are formed.
                                                                                                             ² Accepts the fact that there is a relationship between the chemi
                                                                                                               cal properties of a compound and the nature of bonds.
                                                                                                             ² Investigates the physical properties of ionic and covalent
                                                                                                               bonds.
                                                                                                             ² Use symbols as a method of presenting data.
                                                                                                                ² Make use of models to video concept.
                                                                                                                                                                  Annexe 1.3.1
                                                                                     Instructons to prepare models :
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     Make models,as given in the diagrams,using the rigifoam sheets.




                                                                                                   H                             Na                         Mg




                                                                                                  Mg                         O                              O




                                                                                                                 N                                     Cl
Annexe 1.3.2
                                                                                                                     Instructions for group exploration
                                                                                     •   You are intrested with the exploration of one of the two main groups of classifications of
                                                                                         chemical compounds according to the nature of their bonds.
                                                                                                   •        Covalent bonds
                                                                                                   •        Ionic bonds
                                                                                     •   Using the article on chemical bonds,discuss about the nature of the bonds with regard to
                                                                                         the compounds allocated to you.
                                                                                     •   Present by using models and symbols how the bonds are formed in the type of compounds
                                                                                         allocated to you giving three examples.
                                                                                     •   Calculate the relative molecular mass of the compounds making use of the relative atomic
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                         mass.
                                                                                     •   Find the combining power of ions,groups of ions or atoms in the compounds provided.
                                                                                     •   Find out whether there are other compounds which could be developed from these ions,ion
                                                                                         groups,or atoms.
                                                                                     •   Investegate the solubility in water,physcial nature,heating in the air and conduction of
                                                                                         electricity by an aqueous solution of the compounds in your work station.
                                                                                     •   Be prepared to present your finding to the class.


                                                                                                                                                                    Annex 1.3.3
                                                                                                             Instructions for setting up workstations
                                                                                     • Work station 1
                                                                                               • Sodium chloride
                                                                                               • Calcium hydroxide
                                                                                               • Copper sulphate
                                                                                     • Work station 2
                                                                                               • Glucose
                                                                                               • Ethanol
                                                                                               • Urea

                                                                                     • Keep the following materials in both workstations.
                                                                                                  • water
                                                                                                  • Two drycells
                                                                                               • One metre of connecting wire
                                                                                                 • Torch bulb
                                                                                                 • Two carbon rods
                                                                                                 • Two beakers
                                                                                                • Tin cover and holder
                                                                                               • Burning spirit lamp
Annex 1.3.4


                                                                                                                                Chemical bonds

                                                                                                                 Ionic bonds,ionic compounds and their properties.

                                                                                     An ion is a positively or negatively charged atom or a cluster of atoms.
                                                                                             Na atom                   Na+ ion + e
                                                                                             Mg atom                   Mg2+ion + 2e
                                                                                             Cl atom + e               Cl- ion
                                                                                             S atom + 2e               S2-ion
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     Examples for ions formed by a cluster of atoms are given below.These are known as ion
                                                                                     radicals.
                                                                                              Ammonium ion(NH4)+
                                                                                              Nitrate ion(NO3)-
                                                                                              Sulphate ion(SO4)2-
                                                                                              Phosphate ion(PO4)3-

                                                                                     In electric fields positive ions are attracted to the cathode and the negative ions to the anode.As
                                                                                     such if the charge in the ion is positive it is called a cation and if the charge is negative it is called
                                                                                     an anion. Ionic bonds is formed between positive ion formed by donating completely one or
                                                                                     more electron in the outer most shell of one atom to another atom,and the negative ions formed
                                                                                     by accepting those electrons.This is due to electro statatic attraction between the oppositely
                                                                                     charged ions. Consider following examples.

                                                                                     Ionic compounds have the following endemic properties.
                                                                                             • consist of ions which are oppositely charged.
                                                                                             • Mostly occur as crystalline solid substances.

                                                                                     1. The Nature of Bonding in Sodium chloride




                                                                                                                          ²²                                                  ²²
                                                                                               × × ×                      ²²                          × ×                     ²²
                                                                                                ×                          ²                           ×                       ²
                                                                                         ×          ×             ²                ²²
                                                                                                                                   ² ²→         ×               ×    ײ                 ²²
                                                                                                                                                                                        ²²
                                                                                         ×           ×           ²²                             ×               ×    ²²
                                                                                                 ×                         ²                           ×                       ²
                                                                                                × ×                        ²²                          ××                      ²²
                                                                                                                           ²²                                                  ²²
                                                                                        Sodium Atom             Chlorine Atom                  Sodium ion                Chloride ion

                                                                                             (Na)                        (Cl)                        (Na+)                  (Cl-)
2' The Nature of Bonding in Lithium Oxide

                                     Oxygen Atom
       LithiumAtom                         × ×                           Lithium Atom
                •                              ×                                     •
                                     ×                   ×
               Li            •                O                          •         Li

                •                              ×                                     •
                                              × ×

               Lithium ion               Oxide ion
                                              × ×            2-
                                                                  Lithium ion
                                 +             ×                                     +
                         •                                          •
                        Li           ×                   ×
                                     •         O
                                                         •          Li

                         •                     ×                     •
                                              × ×


3' The Nature of Bonding in Magnisium Oxide
                                                                                         ×              2-
      ×

                                                     →             (Mg)2+ ×               O
     Mg             ×            O



                                                                         Magnisium Oxide ^MgO&

4' The Nature of Bonding in Calcium Chloride
                                                                                                        _



                                         Cl                                      ×         Cl
                    ×




                                                     →            (Ca)2+                                _
          Ca
                                                                                 ×
                        ×




                                                                                          Cl

                                         Cl

                                                                             Calcium Chloride ^CaCl2&
Ionic compounds have the following endermic properties.
        • Consist of ions which are oppositly charged.
        • Mostly occur as crystaline solide subtances.
        • High melting points and boiling points.
        • Most soluble in water.
        • Conducts electricity in aqueous solutions and in the fused state.(heated and liquified)

                 Covalent bonds and properties of covalent compounds

A molecule is an electrically neutral cluster of atoms which is made up of more than one atom
which are of the same element or different elements by sharing electrons.
Here the electrons are shared in such a way that the atoms achieve the electronic configuration
of noble gases.
Each of these shared pair of electrons is a chemical bond.It is indicated by a single short line.



                      • +                                                •
             H
                                ×
                                     H           →              H
                                                                         ×    H



        Two Hydrogen Atoms                                Hydrogen molecule
Outer most shell has one electron                      One electron pair keep share
                                                        In order to obtain of full outer energy
                                                        level and gain the electron configuration
                                                        of the nobel gas Helium




            ••                      ××                        ••             ××

      •             • +                  ×              •            •            ×
      •
            Cl                      Cl         →        •     Cl     ×       Cl   ×
                            ×            ×
           ••                       ××                        ••             ××


     Two Chlorine atoms                                     Chlorine molecule (Cl2)
Outer most shell has seven                    One electron pair keep share in orde to obtain
electrons                                    of full outer energy level and gain the electron
                                             configuration of the nobel gas Argon
×
              ²
      ²                                        ×                   ²            ²                ×
      ²                ²   + ×         O       ×   →               ²       O    ×                ×
              O
                                                                                ²
                                                                                ×
                                                                                         O

              ²²                   ××
      Two Oxygen atoms                                            Oxygen Molecule (O2)
Outer most shell has six electrons.
                                                    Two electrons pair keep share.In order to
                                                   obtain of full outer energy level and gain the
                                                   electron configuration of nobel gas Neon


                                       ×
              ²
                                                                               ²
      ²               ²    + ×
                                               ×
                                               ×   →
                                                                   ²           ×
                                                                               ²             ×
      ²       N                        N                           ²     N     ×
                                                                               ² N           ×
                                                                               ×
              ²                        ×
                  Two Nitrogen atoms                                     Nitrogen molecule
                                                                          (N2)
Outer most shell has five electrons
                                                       Three electron pain keep share. In order to
                                                       obtain of full outer energy level and gain the
                                                       electron configuration of nobel gas Neon




Similarly stucture of water molecule can be shown as follows.




                     ××           ²        H
                                                                                      H
                                                                                 ²
                                                                        ×
                                                                       ×



                                                                                   ×




          ×                   ×                    →
          ×
                                                                                     ²
                                                                     ×



                                                                                ×
                                                                       ×




                      ×           ²        H                                         H


    Oxygen atom                    Two Hydrogen atoms                    Water molecule ^H2O&
Pay your attention to the nature of bonds of Carbon dioxide and Amonia molecules given
below.
       ××

×
×                   ×
                                ²
                                                   ×                                   ×
                                                  ×                ×           ×           ×
         ×                                                         ²
                        ²                 ²   →                                ²
                                                                   ×           ×
        ××                                                         ²           ²
                                                  ×
                                ²                     ×                              ××
×
                    ×
×                           Carbon atom                   Carbon dioxide molecule (CO2)


         ×
Two Oxygen atoms




                            ²       H

             ×                                                         ××

    ×                       ²                                  ×
                                    H
                                              →                                ×
    ×        N
                                                           H   ²       N
                                                                               ²   H

             ×                                                         ×   ²
    Nitrogen atom           ²       H
                                                                           H


                    Three Hydrogen atoms                    Ammonia molecule (NH3)
The number of short lines drawn between the atoms shows the number of electron pairs
                                                                                     shared by the atoms.If the number of shared electron pairs is one,it called a single bond,if two
                                                                                     a double bond and if three, a triple bond. When the bonds are indicated by short lines the
                                                                                     electrons in the outermost shell which do not take part in bonds should also be indicated.
                                                                                                                  ••    ••       ••     ••
                                                                                                    H-H       •   Cl    Cl •     O     O           •   N     N•
                                                                                                              •                                    •
                                                                                                                  ••    •• •     ••    ••                     •

                                                                                     Covalent compounds have the following endemic properties.
                                                                                            •Mostly occur as small neutral molecules made up of few atoms.
                                                                                            •Occur in the solid,liquid and gaseous states.
                                                                                            •Most compounds have low melting points and boiling points.
                                                                                            •Some are soluble in water.
                                                                                            •Do not conduct electricity in aqueous solution.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                       Ionic lattice

                                                                                     The structure which indicates how the ions are arranged in a three dimensional space in a
                                                                                     chemical compound is called an ionic lattice.In the case of some elements the atoms are
                                                                                     arranged in a lattice.The structure of arrangement of atoms which are joined by covalence
                                                                                     bond is a three dimentional space is called an atomic lattice.
                                                                                     Eg1: Carbon-Graphite
                                                                                     Eg. NaCl ionic lattice
Every atom of carbon in graphite exit in a two dimensional
                                                                                                                     lattice by combining with three other carbon atom by single
                                                                                                                     bonds.Graphite blocks are formed by arranging these layers
                                                                                                                     one on top of another.The bonds between these layers are
                                                                                                                     weak and as a result one layer could slide over another easily.
                                                                                                                     Because of this graphite is used as a lubricant.


                                                                                     Eg2: Carbon-diamond
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                        In Diamond every carbon atom forms four covalent bonds
                                                                                                                        with four other carbon atoms and as indicated in the diagram
                                                                                                                        in the form of a three dimensional lattice.Diamond has a high
                                                                                                                        value because it is the hardest substance in nature and is also
                                                                                                                        because it is a very rare and attractive mineral. Making use
                                                                                                                        of the fact that it is the hardest substance it is used to make
                                                                                                                        delicate parts of instruments which should not be wasted
                                                                                                                        and in glass cutting.




                                                                                                                        Molecular lattice

                                                                                     some elements which occur as molecules or molecules of compounds sometimes are arranged
                                                                                     in space as a lattice.The structure which indicates the three dimensional arrangement of
                                                                                     molecules in space is called amolecular lattice.

                                                                                     Eg. Moleculer lattice of Silicon dioxide ( SiO2)
The combining power or the combining ability of an element known its' valency. The following
table indicates the valency of some elements and ion radials.

                                           Valency
                            1                    2                           3
                 Lithium        Li+      Magnesium Mg2+          Aluminium        Al3+
                 Sodium         Na+      Calcium       Ca2+      Iron(III)        Fe3+
      Metal      Potassium      K+       Copper(II)     Cu2+
                 Silver         Ag+      Zinc           Zn2+
                 Copper^I&      Cu+      Irona(II)      Fe2+
                                         Lead           Pb2+
                                         Barium         Ba2+


                 Hydrogen       H+       Oxide        O2-        Nitride         N3-

      Non        Fluoride        F-      Sulphide     S2-
      Metal      Chloride       Cl-
                 Bromide        Br-
                 Hydride        H-


                 Hydroxide      OH-      Carbonate     CO32-     Phosphate       PO43-
              Nitrate   NO3-             Sulphate       SO42-
     Iron                   +
     Radical Ammoinum NH4
             Hydrogen HCO3-
              Carbonate




The chemical formula of a compound is by using symbols and the number of different atoms in
the molecule of the compound,

H2             In the hydrogen molecule there are two hydrogen atoms.
Cl2            In the chlorine molecule there are two chlorine atoms
NH3           In the Ammonia molecule, there is one Nitrogen atom and three hydrogen atoms.
H2SO4         In Sulphuric acid molecule, two atoms of hydrogen, one atom of sulpher and four
              atoms of Oxigen

When a compound if formed by atoms of two elements they must be constructed in such a
way so as to balance the valencies of atom
Example-   1. Sodium chioride is made of univalent Na+ ion and univalent Cl- ion
                                                                                                  combining .Formula - NaCl
                                                                                                2. Magnesium chloride is made by bivalent Mg2+ ion and two
                                                                                                    univalent Cl- ions.-Formula- MgCl2
                                                                                                3. Magnesium oxide is made up of bivalent Mg2+ ion and bi valent
                                                                                                   oxygen O2- ion combining formula -MgO
                                                                                                4. Sodium hydroxide is formed by univalent Na+ combining with uni
                                                                                                   valent(OH)- ion.Formula-NaOH
                                                                                                5. Sodium carbonate is formed by two ions of univalent Na+ and
                                                                                                   bivalent (CO3)2- . Formula Na2CO3
                                                                                                6. Copper sulphate is formed by bivalent Cu2+ combining with
                                                                                                  bivalent (SO4)2- ion, Formula CuSO4
                                                                                                7. Aluminium sulphate is formed by two atoms of trivalent Al3+ ion
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                   combining with three ions of bivalent (SO42-)ions
                                                                                     .              Formula Al2(SO4)3
                                                                                                8. Water molecule is formed by two atoms of univalent hydrogen
                                                                                                   combining with one atom of bivalent oxygen. Formula H2O
                                                                                                9. To develop the above formulae the valency of atoms,ions or ion
                                                                                                   radicals of simple compounds could be made use of,seewhether it
                                                                                                   is possible to draw a connection between the formula of the
                                                                                                   compound and the valency of atom or ion radicals using the
                                                                                                    above example.
Competency             1.0( Investigates the Scientific findings about the
                                                                                                                 structure of matter and quantity.


                                                                                     Competency level       1.4   Use mole to quantify elements and Compounds.
                                                                                     Activity               1.4   ( Let us quantify matter.
                                                                                     Time                         ( 120 minutes
                                                                                     Quality inputs               ( ² An enlarged copy of data table given in annexe 1.4.1
                                                                                                                    ² Two copies of instructions for exploration given in
                                                                                                                       annexe 1.4.2
                                                                                                                    ² Demy papers and pastels
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     Teaching-learning process (
                                                                                     Step       1.4.1     ( ² Asks from the students that if the mass of a two rupee coin is
                                                                                                                  8g what is the easiest way to seperate ten thousand of those
                                                                                                                  coins.
                                                                                                                     ² Exhibit the data table to the class.
                                                                                                                     ² Direct students to get together in group of two and calcu
                                                                                                                         late the number of atoms in a relative mass of an atom,in
                                                                                                                         grammes,or the number of molecule in grammes.
                                                                                                                     ² Lead a discussion highlighting the following facts.
                                                                                                                         ² The number of atoms in a relative atomic mass of an
                                                                                                                             element in grammes has been calculated to be about
                                                                                                                             6.022x1023
                                                                                                                         ² The number of molecules in a relative molecular mass
                                                                                                                             of a compound in grammes has to be calculated to be
                                                                                                                             about 6.022x1023
                                                                                                                         ² The number of atoms in a relative atomic mass of an
                                                                                                                             element in grammes or the number of the molecules
                                                                                                                             in a relative molecular mass of a compound in grammes
                                                                                                                             is 6.022x1023
                                                                                                                         ² A mole of a substance is 6.022x1023 fundamental enti
                                                                                                                             ties of that substance
                                                                                                                             6.022x1023ffundamental units which make up matter,the
                                                                                                                             atom,molecule,ion,subatomic particles is called a mole
                                                                                                                             of that matter.
                                                                                                                         ² Mole is an international unit which measure the quantity
                                                                                                                           of matters.
² The number of fundamental units included in a mole is
                                                                                                                     constant,this constant called the Avogardo Constant(L
                                                                                                                      or NA)
                                                                                                           (        ² Avogadro constant is NA= 6.022 x 1023 mol-1
                                                                                                                    ² The mass of a mole of substance is called the molecu
                                                                                                                       lar mass of that substance.(M)
                                                                                                                     Eg.In a mole of carbon atom mass of 6.022x1023
                                                                                                                       carbon atom is 12g
                                                                                                                    Hence molecular mass of carbon is 12gmol-1
                                                                                                                    Eg.In a mole of water there are 6.022x1023 molecules
                                                                                                                       of water.Its` mass is 18g.Hence the molecular mass
                                                                                                                       of water is 18gmol-1
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                    ² The value of the mass of an element when stated in
                                                                                                                        grammes is equal to the relative atomic mass of that
                                                                                                                        element.
                                                                                                                    ² The value of the mass of a mole of compound when
                                                                                                                        stated in grammes is the relative molecular mass of that
                                                                                                                        compound.
                                                                                                                   ² When it is required to weight substance of small mass
                                                                                                                        like atoms,molecules ,it is easy to weight the required
                                                                                                                        amount of that substance.
                                                                                                                   ² When we want to seperate a quantity of substance,the
                                                                                                                        knowledge of the molecular mass of that substance is
                                                                                                                        useful.
                                                                                                                                                                    (15 minutes)
                                                                                     Step    1.4.2       (         ² Divide the class into three groups.
                                                                                                                   ² Provide each group with copies of the article instruc
                                                                                                                        tions for exploration,demy paper and marker pens.
                                                                                                                   ² Assign tasks and engage groups in exploration.
                                                                                                                   ² Prepare them to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                                                                                 (60 minutes)
                                                                                     Step   1.4.3    ² Get groups to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                     ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to elaborate on the
presentation.
                     ² Get the other groups to propose Constructive suggestions.
                     ² Summerize highlighting the following points.
                          ² If the mass of an element/compound(m),and the number of
                                 moles of Atoms/molecules(n)
                                 The relationship is n=m/M
                          ² The mass of a quantity of moles(n)of an element /compound
                           is(m),we get the following relationship.
                                                m = Mxn
                          ² The mass of an (N) number of atoms of an element is(m),
                              The relationship we get is
                                                m = MxN/NA
                          ² The relationship we get when a mass(m) of an element/com
                            pound contain(N) number of molecules is
                                                N = (m/M)xNA
                           ² When (n) number of moles of an element/compound contain(N)
                              number molecules the relationship is
                                                N = nxNA
                           ² The relationship of mass of an atom /molecule(m0) is shown by
                                                m 0= M/NA.
                           ² When it is required to get a specific quantity of matter and
                              quantitative      calculations in chemistry,the above relation
                              ships are useful.



                                                                              (45 mts)


Criteria for assessment and Evaluation
² Define the terms mole,Avogadro constant and molecular mass.
² Accepts that in chemistry when there is a need to quantify elements/compounds.
² Develop relationsship associated with quantitative of elements and compounds.
² Shows relationalships using equation.
² Investigates the accuracy of a relationaship.
Annex 1.4.1
                                                                                                                               Data Table


                                                                                           Element      Mass of          Relative           Compound Mass of    Relative
                                                                                                        a atom/g         Atomic                      a compound Molecular
                                                                                                                         Mass                        molecule/g Mass

                                                                                              H         1.66 x 10 -24     1                   H2O        2.99 x 10 -23    18

                                                                                                                                              CH4       2.65 x 10 -23     16
                                                                                              C        1.99 x 10   -23   12
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                                              NH3       2.82 x 10 -23     17
                                                                                             N          2.32 x 10 -23 14


                                                                                                                                              CO 2      7.31 x 10 -23     44
                                                                                             O         2.66 x 10 -23      16




                                                                                                                                                                         Annex 1.4.2

                                                                                                                  Instructions for group exploration
                                                                                     ² Focus your attention to the type of matter given below assigned to your group.
                                                                                       ² Element
                                                                                        ² Compound
                                                                                     ² Develop suitable expressions to quantify the matter assigned to you.It is possible to include
                                                                                      Avogardo constant NA whereever suitable.
                                                                                                ² m0 mass of an electron of element/ mass of a molecule of a compound whose
                                                                                                   molecular mass is M
                                                                                                ² mass m of an element/compound contains n moles of atoms/molecules whose
                                                                                                   molecular mass is M
                                                                                                ² mass m of an element/compound contains N number of atoms/molecules
                                                                                                   whose molecular mass is M
                                                                                                ² In n moles of an element/ compound contained N atoms/ molecules whose
                                                                                                  molecular mass is M
                                                                                     ² By making use of the relationships appropriately, select the problems and final solutions to
                                                                                       the matter assigned to you.
                                                                                       ² The molecular mass of carbon is 12gmol-1 .Find the number of moles in 10g of carbon.
                                                                                       ² The releative atomic mass of oxygen is 16.Find the number of atoms in 10g of oxygen.
² The molecular mass of nitrogen is 14gmol-1.Find the mass of an atom of nitrogen.
                                                                                       ² The molecular mass of hydrogen is 1g mol-1. Find the number of hydrogen atoms in 0.1
                                                                                         mol of hydrogen.
                                                                                       ² The molecular mass of carbondioxide is 44gmol-1.Find the number of atoms in 20g of
                                                                                         carbon dioxide.
                                                                                       ² The relative molecular of Methane is 16gmol-1.Find the number of moles in 0.2g of
                                                                                         methane.
                                                                                       ² The molecular mass of water is 18g mol-1.Find the number of moles in 20g of water.
                                                                                     ² Be prepared to present your findings to the class.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.
Competency            2.0 ( Investigates Periodic patterns in properties of
                                                                                                                 elements.

                                                                                     Competency level      2.1 ( Investigates properties of elements change according
                                                                                                                 to the atomic number.
                                                                                     Activity             2.1 ( Let us investigate the changing patterns in properties of
                                                                                                                 matter..
                                                                                     Time                      ( 120 minutes
                                                                                     Quality inputs            ( ² Four copies of instructions for exploration given in annex
                                                                                                                     2.1.1
                                                                                                                 ² Four copies of "Physical properties of matter" table given
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                     in annex 2.1.2
                                                                                                                 ² Graph papers demy papers and pastel
                                                                                     Teaching learning process (
                                                                                     Step       2.1.1          ( ² Display the class an enlarged figure of the diagram
                                                                                                                        below.

                                                                                                                                                                               )

                                                                                                                     ² Get some of the student to complete the pattern given
                                                                                                                       above.
                                                                                                                     ² Conduct a discussion highlighting the following points•
                                                                                                                       ² There is a pattern in the change in direction of the
                                                                                                                          arrow.
                                                                                                                       ² After a definite number of squares we come across an
                                                                                                                          arrow which is directed in a similar direction.
                                                                                                                       ² Patterns which occur again and agian at definite
                                                                                                                          intervals are known as periodic pattern
                                                                                                              .        ² Awareness of patterns simplify science education.
                                                                                                                                                                    (15 mts)
                                                                                     I
                                                                                     Step       2.1.2             ( ² Divide the class into three groups.
                                                                                                                    ² Provide the groups with exploration
                                                                                                                      instructions,table,graph papers,demy papers and pastel.

                                                                                                                     ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration.
                                                                                                                     ² Prepare them to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                                                                                      (60 minutes)
                                                                                                                          45
Step   2.1.3       ( ² Get each group to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                          ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to
                                                                                                            elaborate on the presentation.
                                                                                                          ² Get the other groups to propose constructive sugges
                                                                                                               tions,
                                                                                                          ² Elaborate highlighting the following points.
                                                                                                            That,
                                                                                                            ² C and Si elements are at the top graph on of melting
                                                                                                               points
                                                                                                            ² He,Ne,Ar elements are at the bottom of the graph on
                                                                                                               melting points.
                                                                                                            ² According to the graph the variation in temperature of
                                                                                                               liquifactors shows a periodic pattern.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                            ² Element C and Si are at the top of the graph boiling
                                                                                                               points.
                                                                                                            ² Elements He,Ne,Ar are at the bottom of the graph
                                                                                                               giving boiling points
                                                                                                            ² According to the graph the variation in boiling points
                                                                                                               shows a periodic pattern.
                                                                                                            ² Elements B and Al are at the top of the graph
                                                                                                               givining density
                                                                                                    .       ² Elements H,N,Na and K are at the bottom of the
                                                                                                               graph giving density.
                                                                                                            ² According to the graph indicating variation in density
                                                                                                               shows a periodic pattern.
                                                                                                            ² The volume occupied by a molecular mass of an
                                                                                                               element when expressed in cubic centimetres it is
                                                                                                               called the atomic volume.
                                                                                                            ² In the graph giving the atomic volumes of
                                                                                                               elements,He,Na, and K elements are placed at the
                                                                                                               top.
                                                                                                            ² In the graph giving the atomic volumes of elements B
                                                                                                               and Al elements are placed at the bottom.
                                                                                                            ² According to the graph, variation in atomic volumes
                                                                                                               of elements shows a periodic pattern.
                                                                                                            ² Properties of elements is a periodic function of the
                                                                                                               atomic number.

                                                                                                                                                      (45 mts)




                                                                                                               46
Criteria for assessment and evaluation
                                                                                     ² Explain the variation in pattern of temperature of liquifaction/boiling point/density/
                                                                                       atomic volume, of elements against the atomic number.
                                                                                     ² Appreciates that there is a periodic variation shown by the atomic number against
                                                                                       properties of elements.
                                                                                     ² Draw graphs to show variation of properties of elements.
                                                                                     ² Explatins a graph.
                                                                                     ² Makes educational activities easy by understanding patterns.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                                                                         Annex 2.1.1
                                                                                                                  Instructions for group exploration

                                                                                     ² Your group is expected to investigate how one of the properties given below vary according
                                                                                      to the Atomic number.
                                                                                                  ² Melting point of elements
                                                                                                  ² Boiling points of elements
                                                                                                  ² Density of elements
                                                                                                  ² Atomic volume of elements
                                                                                     ² Using the table given draw a graph with Atomic number against the respective property.
                                                                                     ² Enlarge the graph developed by you, and draw on a demy paper.
                                                                                     ² Be prepared to present your findings to the whole class




                                                                                                                             47
Annex 2.1.2

                           Physical Properties of Elements

                                                                Density     Atomic
   Elements       Atomic          Melting        Boiling
                                                                at 20 0C    volume
                  number          point/ 0C      point/0C
                                                                g cm-3      cm3 mol-1

      H               1            -259            -253          0.071         14.1

      He              2            -270          -268.9          0.125         31.8

      Li              3             180           1330             0.53        13.1

      Be              4            1283           3000            11.84          4.9

      B               5            2030           2550             2.34          4.3

      C               6            3600           4800             2.25          5.4

      N               7            -210            -196            0.81        17.3

      O               8            -218            -183            1.14        14.0

      F               9            -220            -188            1.15        17.1

      Ne             10            -249            -245            1.20        16.8

      Na             11             97.8            890            0.97        23.7

      Mg             12             651           1100             1.74        14.0

      Al             13             660           2500             2.70        10.0

      Si             14            1410           2400             2.42        16.6

      P              15              44             280            2.34        14.1

      S              16             113             445            2.07        15.5

      Cl             17            -103             -35            2.00        18.7

      Ar             18            -189            -186            1.66        24.0

      K              19              63             766            0.87        45.0

      Ca             20             840           1500             1.55        26.0


(Source : Book of Data for Teachers of Chemistry / 1989, NIE)




                                   48
Competency            2.0 ( Investigates Periodic patterns in properties of
                                                                                                                 elements.

                                                                                     Competency level         (
                                                                                                           2.2( Investigates the realtionship between the position in
                                                                                                                periodic table and the properties of elements.


                                                                                     Activity              2.2   ( Let us return to the periodic table.

                                                                                     Time                      ( 120 minutes
                                                                                     Quality inputs            ( ² Provide a large elaborate periodic table in annexe 2.2.1
                                                                                                                 ² Four copies of Instructions for exploration given in
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                   annexe 2.2.2
                                                                                                                 ² Four copies of "Diversity in Physical and chemical
                                                                                                                   properties" of elements in annexe 2.2.3
                                                                                                                 ² Graph papers demy papers and pastel
                                                                                     Teaching learning process (
                                                                                     Step       2.2.1          ( ² Exhibit the periodic table to the class.
                                                                                                                 ² Direct the students to observe the data indicated by
                                                                                                                   symbols,numbers and colours.
                                                                                                                 ² Conduct a discussion highlighting the following point.
                                                                                                                      ²The elements are grouped in the periodic table for
                                                                                                                       easy study of element.
                                                                                                                       ²The transverse rows of the periodic table are called
                                                                                                                        periods,they numbered as 1,2,3,4 etc.The vertical
                                                                                                                        rows are called groups and they are numbered
                                                                                                                        I,II,III,IV,V,VI,VII,VIII or O
                                                                                                                       ²The elements are grouped in the periodic table as
                                                                                                                       periods and groups ,according to a foundation based
                                                                                                                       on argument.
                                                                                                                                                               (15 mts)

                                                                                     Step       2.2.2            ( ² Divide the class into three groups.
                                                                                                                   ² Provide the groups with instructions for exploration
                                                                                                                     graph papers,demy papers and pastel.

                                                                                                                    ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration.
                                                                                                                    ² Prepare them to present their findings to the whole class.
                                                                                                                                                                    (60 minutes)

                                                                                                                         49
Step   2.2.3   ( ² Get each group to present their findings to the class.
                 ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to
                   elaborate on the presentation.
                 ² Get the other groups to propose constructive sugges
                      tions,
                 ² Elaborate highlighting the following points.
                   That,
                   ² The number of electrons in the outermost shell of an
                      atom of the element is equal to the number of the
                      group to which the element belongs.
                   ² The number of shells containing electrons is equal to
                      the number of the period to which the element
                      belongs.
                   ² Most elements to the left hand side of the periodic
                      table are found in the solid state.
                   ² The elements at the top on the right hand side of the
                      periodic table are in the gaseous state.
                   ² The elements in the left hand side of the periodic table
                      are mostly metals and when you go forward along a
                      period non metals are found.
                   ² When you move down along a group containing
                      metals there are elements which show strong metallic
                      properties.
                   ² The density of elements from groups I to IV in 2 and
                      3 periods,increase regularly ,but from V to O it
                      decrease regularly.
                   ² When we move forward along 2 and 3 periods,the
                      atomic volume decrease up to group III,gradually
                       increase thereafter.
                   ² When we move forward along 2 and 3 periods,from
                      group I to IV the melting point and the boiling point
                      increase where as groups V,VI,VII and O the
                      elements have very low melting point and boiling
                      points.
                   ² When we move forward along a period,the
                      oxides,chlorids and hydrides changes from ionic
                      to covalent types.
                                                                (45 mts)




                      50
Criteria for assessment and evaluation

² Explain varying patterns of properties of elements when moving forwards along periods
  and down along groups.
² Appreciate that the elements are classified in the periodic table for easy study of properties
 of elements.
² Discovers connection between the position of element in the periodic table and the proper
  ties of the element.
² Understands natural patterns.
² Use graphs to present data meaningfully when it is suitable.




                                        51
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




     .




52
                                                                                              Periodic Table
                                                                                                               Annex 2.2.1
Annexe2.2.2
                                                                                                            Instructions for group exploration
                                                                                     ² Your group is assigned to study the relationship between the place in the periodic table and
                                                                                      its properties in one of the following.
                                                                                        ² moving forward along the second period
                                                                                        ² moving forward along the third period
                                                                                        ² moving down along groups I,II,III,IV
                                                                                        ² moving down along groups V,VI,VII,O
                                                                                     ² By using the periodic table and the table privided understand the patterns in the following.
                                                                                        ² Number of electrons in the outer most shell
                                                                                        ² Metallic,non metallic,physical state
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                        ² Density
                                                                                        ² Atomic volume
                                                                                        ² Melting point/Boiling point
                                                                                        ² Acidicity-Basicity of oxides/Hydrides
                                                                                     ²Be prepared to present your findings to the class using graphs whenever required.




                                                                                                                            53
Annex 2.2.3

                                                                                                 Diversity of Chemical and Physical Properties of elements


                                                                                                                                               Atomic
                                                                                                     Electronic Metalic/   Nature of   Density Volume melting Boiling
                                                                                     Elements Atomic            Non
                                                                                              Number Config.               Oxide               cm-3    point 0C point0C
                                                                                                                Metalic                gcm-3
                                                                                                                                               mol
                                                                                       H       1      1                                 0.071     14.1    -259      -253
                                                                                       He      2      2                                 0.125    31.8     -270     -268.9
                                                                                       Li      3      2, 1                               0.53    13.1      180      1330
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                       Be      4      2, 2                              11.84     4.9     1283      3000
                                                                                       B       5      2, 3                               2.34     4.3     2030      2550
                                                                                       C       6      2, 4                               2.25     5.4     3600      4800
                                                                                       N       7      2, 5                               0.81    17.3     -210      -196
                                                                                       O       8      2, 6                               1.14    14.0     -218      -183
                                                                                       F       9      2, 7                               1.15    17.1     -220      -188
                                                                                       Ne      10     2, 8                               1.20    16.8     -249      -245
                                                                                       Na      11     2, 8, 1                            0.97    23.7     97.8       890
                                                                                       Mg      12     2, 8, 2                            1.74    14.0      651      1100
                                                                                       Al      13     2, 8, 3                            2.70    10.0      660      2500
                                                                                       Si      14     2, 8, 4                            2.42    16.6     1410      2400
                                                                                       P       15     2, 8, 5                            2.34    14.1        44      280
                                                                                       S       16     2, 8, 6                            2.07    15.5        113     445
                                                                                       Cl      17     2, 8, 7                            2.00    18.7     -103        -35
                                                                                       Ar      18     2, 8, 8                            1.66    24.0     -189      -186
                                                                                       K       19     2, 8, 8, 1                         0.87    45.0        63      766
                                                                                       Ca      20     2, 8, 8, 2                         1.55    26.0      840      1500


                                                                                       Ga      31     2, 8, 18, 3                        5.90    11.8        30     2237
                                                                                       Ge      32     2, 8, 18, 4                        5.46    13.3      937      2837
                                                                                       As      33     2, 8, 18, 5                        5.72    13.1      613 sublimation
                                                                                       Se      34     2, 8, 18, 6                        4.80    16.5      220       685
                                                                                       Br      35     2, 8, 18, 7                        3.12    25.6      -7.2     58.5
                                                                                       Kr      36     2, 8, 18, 8                        3.00    32.3     -157      -153




                                                                                                                      54
Competency          3.0 ( Use chemical reactions appropriatily to fulfil
                                                                                                               requirments in life.
                                                                                     Competency level    3.1   Classify chemical recations


                                                                                     Activity            3.1   ( Let us understand about types of reactions.
                                                                                     .


                                                                                     Time                      ( 120 minutes
                                                                                     Quality inputs            ( ² !0 cm3 of concentrated nitric acid
                                                                                                                 ² A copper wire of 30 cm length,half of which is made into
                                                                                                                   a coil
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                 ² Boiling tube
                                                                                                                 ² Four work station prepared according to instructions
                                                                                                                   given in annex 3.1.1
                                                                                                                 ² Four copies of instructions for group exploration given in
                                                                                                                   annexe 3.1.2
                                                                                                                 ² Demy paper and pastel


                                                                                     Teaching learning process (
                                                                                     Step       3.1.1     .    (
                                                                                                                   ² Introduce the coiled end of the copper wire into the
                                                                                                                     boiling tube containing concentrated HNO3and display to
                                                                                                                     the class.




                                                                                                                   ² Direct the students to observe what happens
                                                                                                                   ² Conduct a discussion highlighting the following points.
                                                                                                                     ² When conc HNO3 reacts with Cu metal given
                                                                                                                        coloured Cu(NO3)2 solution is formed and reddish
                                                                                                                        brown coloured NO2is given out.



                                                                                                                       55
² During chemical reactions ,simple substances are
                                                                                                            converted to complex substances or complex
                                                                                                            substances are converted to simple substances.
                                                                                                          ² The chemical reactions could be grouped according
                                                                                                            to the nature of the reaction.


                                                                                                                                                     (15 mts.)

                                                                                     Step   3.1.2   ( ² Divide the class into four groups.
                                                                                                      ² Provide the groups with instructions for exploration
                                                                                                        graph papers,demy papers and pastel.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                      ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration.
                                                                                                      ² Prepare them to present their findings to the whole class.
                                                                                                                                                       (60 minutes)
                                                                                     Step   3.1.3   ( ² Get each group to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                      ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to
                                                                                                        elaborate on the presentation.
                                                                                                      ² Get the other groups to propose constructive sugges
                                                                                                           tions,
                                                                                                      ² Elaborate highlighting the following points.
                                                                                                        That,
                                                                                                        ² Elements Iron and sulphur combine to form sulphide.
                                                                                                        ² Magnesium and oxygen combine to form magnesium
                                                                                                           oxide.
                                                                                                        ² When a different compound is formed when an ele
                                                                                                           ment-element,or element-compound or compound-
                                                                                                           compound combine is known as a combination
                                                                                                           reaction.
                                                                                                        ² When potassium permanganate is heated it dissociates
                                                                                                           into simple compounds.
                                                                                                        ² When hydrogen peroxide is heated it dissociates into
                                                                                                           simple compounds.
                                                                                                        ² When a compound dissociates into simple compounds
                                                                                                           or to elements and simple compounds,it is called a
                                                                                                           dissociation reaction.
                                                                                                        ² Metal magnesium,reacts with copper sulphate releasing
                                                                                                           Cu metal forming Magnesium sulphate.
                                                                                                        ² Zinc metal reacts with dilute sulphuric acid liberating H2
                                                                                                           gas and form zinc sulphate.


                                                                                                           56
² When an element displace another element in a compound
                                     and takes its place and form another compound it is
                                     called single replacement reaction.
                                  ² When calcium chloride react with sodium carbonate
                                     calcium carbonate and sodium chloride is formed.
                                  ² When ferrous sulphate reacts with sodium hydroxide
                                     ,ferrous hydroxide and sodium sulphate is formed.
                                  ² When an element or a radical of a compound,reacts with
                                     an element or a radical of another compound undergo an
                                     exchange reaction it is known as a doubel replacement
                                     reaction.

                                                                                (60 mts)
Criteria for assessment and evaluation
² Classify chemical reaction and describe using examples.
² Apperciates that chemical changes during a reaction can be made use of to classify chemical
 change.
² Demonstrate chemical reaction.
² Data given using symbols are made use of gainfully.
² Demonstrate skills in using equipment.


                                                                                Annexe3.1.1
Instructions to set up work stations
Set up four work stations by keeping the following materials.label materials and equipments.
Work station 01
             ² Iron filings 3.5 g
             ² Sulphur powder 1.5g
             ² Boiling tubes 01
             ² Holders 01
             ² Sprit lamp 01
             ² Piece of Magnesium ribbon 01
Work station 02
            ² KMnO4 4g
           ² H2O2 solution 20 cm3
           ² Boiling tubes 02
            ² Holders 01
           ² Spirit lamp 01
           ² Dry ekle pieces 02



                                      57
Work station 03
                                                                                                ² 2 cm length of clean magnesium ribbon
                                                                                                ² Solution of Cuso4(2g of Cuso4 in 100cm3 of water)
                                                                                                ² Zinc pieces 1g
                                                                                                ² Dilute H2SO4 acid 10 cm3
                                                                                                ² Two test tubes
                                                                                                ² Test tube rack
                                                                                     Work station 04
                                                                                                ² CaCl2 solution (CaCl2 0.5g in 10 cm3 of water)
                                                                                                ² Na2CO3 solution (Na2CO3 0.5g in 10 cm3 of water)
                                                                                                ² FeSO4 solution(FeSO4 0.5g in 10 cm3 of water)
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                ² NaOH solution (NaOH 0.5g in 10 cm3 of water)
                                                                                                ² Four test tubes
                                                                                                ² Test tube rack

                                                                                     Instructions for group exploration

                                                                                     ² Concentrate your attention on the two reactions assigned to your group.
                                                                                          ² Heating iron filings with sulphur/burn magnesium in air
                                                                                           ² Heating of Potassium permanganate/Heating of Hydrogen peroxide
                                                                                           ² Reaction between magnesium and Copper sulphate/Reaction between zinc and dilute
                                                                                            sulphuric acid
                                                                                           ² Reaction between Calcium Chloride and Sodium Carbonate/Reaction between
                                                                                            ferrous sulphate and Sodium hydroxide
                                                                                     ² Familiarize yourself with the materials kept at the respective work station.
                                                                                     ² Conduct the reaction and record your observations.
                                                                                     ² Write down the equations for the chemical reactions.
                                                                                     ² Using prefered symbols,develop a common equation to represent both reactions.
                                                                                     ² Be prepared to present your findings to the class.




                                                                                                                          58
Competency            3.0 :Use chemical reactions appropriatily to fulfil
                                                                                                                 requirments in life.
                                                                                     Competency level      3.2   : Investigates interaction between matter and electricity


                                                                                     Activity              3.2   : Let us find out connection betwen matter and electricity
                                                                                     .
                                                                                     Time                        : 120 minutes
                                                                                     Quality inputs              : • copper and zink sheet of 2 cm x 5 cm size.
                                                                                                                   • Fruit (Lime,Orange,Apple) or potatoe yam
                                                                                                                   • LED bulb
                                                                                                                   • Three copies of instructions group exploration given in
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                     annex 3.2.1
                                                                                                                   • Common table prepaired according to instructions in
                                                                                                                     annex 3.2.2
                                                                                                                   • Demy paper and pastel

                                                                                     Teaching learning process : • Insert the zink and copper sheets into the fruit
                                                                                                                   (Lime,Orenge,Apple) or potato yam, so that they are
                                                                                                                   close together but not touching. Connect the LED bulb
                                                                                                                   amd demostrate its' glow.
                                                                                                                 • Conduct a discussion highlighting the following.

                                                                                                                       • That electricity is produced when subtances in the
                                                                                                                         fruit/potato yam interacts with the metals.
                                                                                                                       • There is an inter connection between matter and
                                                                                                                         electricity
                                                                                                                                                                  (15 mts.)
                                                                                     Step       3.2.1               • Divide the class into three groups.
                                                                                                                    • Provide the groups with instructions for exploration,
                                                                                                                      demy paper and pastels.
                                                                                                                    • assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration.
                                                                                                                    • Prepare them to present their findings to the whole class
                                                                                                                                                                  (60 mts.)



                                                                                     Step       3.2.2            : • Get the group to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                                   • Give the first opportunity for elaboration to the respec
                                                                                                                     tive group which made the presentation.
                                                                                                                   • Get the other groups to propose constructive suggestions


                                                                                                                        59
• Elaborate highlighting the following points.

       • The following observations were noted when Copper
         (II) Chloride solution was electrolyse.
       • Copper was deposited on the electrode connected to
         the negative terminal of the battery.
         Cu2+ (aq) + 2e         Cu(s)
       • Chlorine gas was liberated at the electrode connected to the
         positive terminal of the battery.
         2Cl - (aq) + 2e         Cl2 (g) + 2e
       • When a moist litmus paper was exposed to Chlorine gas it
         decolourised.
       • The green colour of the solution grsduslly redused.
       • temperature of the system increased.

                                                         ( 45 mts)
)

    • With lighting of the bulb, flow of current through the electrolyte
      was confirmed.
    • It is possible to change matter by supplying electricity from
      outside.
    • Effecting a chemical change at the electrodes by passing a
      current through an ionic solution (electrolyte) is known as
      electrolysis.
    • During electroplating of the iron plate the following observa
      tions were made.
      • Copper was deposited as a thin film on the iron plate.
          Cu2+ (aq) + 2e         Cu(s)
      • Copper plate gradually dissolved.
          Cu(s)           Cu2+ (aq) + 2e
      • Colour of the solution did not change
      • Level of the solution increased.
    • The depositing of a metal on a surface is known as Electroplat-
      ing.
    • By electroplating a surface gets a metallic finish and protection.
    • When bulb is connected between Copper and Zink plates
      immersed in dilute sulphuric acid,
      • The bulb ignited.
      • Zink plate gradually dissolved.
      • Gas bubbles got collected on the Copper plate.
    • When bulb is connected between Copper and Zink plates
      immersed in dilute sulphuric acid, an electric current is pro-
      duced
    • A set up where an electric current is produced, associated with
      a chemical change is known as an electric cell.
    • Electric currrent could be obtained from dry cells and batteries.
              60
• Removal of electrons from an atom, an ion or a radical is
                                                                                                                 Oxcidation.
                                                                                                           • Intake of electron from an atom, an ion or a radical is Reduction.
                                                                                                           • Electrode where Oxidation is taking place is known as Anode.
                                                                                                           • Electrode where reduction is taken place is known as Cathode.
                                                                                                                                                                   (45 mts)
                                                                                     Criteria for assesment and evaluation

                                                                                                              • Explain about electric cells, electrolysis and electroplating.
                                                                                                              • Appreciates that it is possible to enhance daily living using the
                                                                                                                   relationship between matter and electricity.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                              • Investigates the relationship between matter and electricity.
                                                                                                              • Prepair a diagram with a set up selecting the materials.
                                                                                                              • Use demostration effectively for communication.

                                                                                                                 Instruction for group exploration

                                                                                     • Your group is assigned to study the interaction between matter and electricity using one of
                                                                                       the following.
                                                                                                              • Chemical cells.
                                                                                                              • Electrolysis
                                                                                                              • Electroplating

                                                                                     • Study the diagram in the respective precincts , select the necessary materials to prepare the
                                                                                       set up from the commen table.
                                                                                                             • Make the setup.
                                                                                                             • .Observe the following and report on the set up relevant to you
                                                                                                                 • Changes that take place at the electrodes.
                                                                                                                 • Changes in the solution.
                                                                                                                 • Is there a change in temperature during the reaction?
                                                                                                                 • Did the bulb ignit?
                                                                                                             • What are the possible ions in the solution provide to you?
                                                                                                             • Be prepared to present your findings to the class along with a
                                                                                                                    demostration.




                                                                                                                           61
Annex 3.2.2
                 Keeping diagrams in the work stations

Work Station 1                     4V _
                              +

                                                 Bulb
                          +                _

                                                 Carbon Electrodes



                                                  CuCl2 Aqeous Solution


                               Eletrolysis
Work Station 2
                                    4V _
                               +

                                                  Bulb
                           +               _
                                                 Cu Electrode
                                                 Fe Electrode


                                                   CuSO4Aqeous Solution


                               Electroplateing
Work Station 3                        Bulb




                                                  Zn Electrode
                                                  Cu Electrode




                                                  Dil. H2SO4 Solution

                               Chemical Cell


                              62
Annex 3.2.3

                                                                                                            Materials and apperatus on common table

                                                                                     • Carbon Electrodes 02
                                                                                     • Copper electrodes 02
                                                                                     • Zinc electrodes       01
                                                                                     • 2 cm x 5 cm Iron plate (surface cleaned )
                                                                                     • Dry Cells             06
                                                                                     • 1.5 V Bulbs           03
                                                                                     • Thermometers          03
                                                                                     • 100 cm3 Beaker        03
                                                                                     • 0.5 mol dm-3 CuCl2 aqeous solution 100 cm3
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     • 0.1 mol dm-3 Dil. H2SO4 Solution    100 cm3
                                                                                                  -3
                                                                                     • 0.1 mol dm CuSO4 Solution           100 cm3
                                                                                     • Litmus papers
                                                                                     • Connecting wires




                                                                                                                                α




                                                                                                                                                                    α




                                                                                                                                                                        ±±




                                                                                     .




                                                                                                                       63
Competency            3.0 ( Use chemical changes suitably to fulfil necessities
                                                                                                                 in life

                                                                                     Competency level      3.3   ( Investigates reaction patterns of pure metals.

                                                                                     Activity              3.3   ( Let us explore the reactivity of metals.

                                                                                     Time                      ( 120 minutes
                                                                                     Quality inputs            ( ² Piece of Sodium metal,knife and a basin of water
                                                                                                                 ² Four work stations prepared according to instrutions
                                                                                                                   given in annex 3.3.1
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                 ² Four copies of instructions for group exploration given in
                                                                                                                   annex 3.3.2
                                                                                                                 ² Demy papers and pastel
                                                                                     Teaching learning process (
                                                                                     Step       3.3.1          ( ² Direct the students to observe how a cut surface a
                                                                                                                   freshly cut piece of sodium change with time.
                                                                                                                 ² Demonstrate to the class the reaction between sodium
                                                                                                                   and water by putting a piece of sodium into a basin of
                                                                                                                   water.
                                                                                                                 ² Conduct a discussion highlighting the following points.
                                                                                                                      ² Sodium is a pure metal.
                                                                                                                      ² When a freshly cut surface of sodium metal is
                                                                                                                        exposed to air for a short time it looses its shine.
                                                                                                                      ² Sodium metal reacted vigorously with cold water.
                                                                                                                      ² It is possible for the reactivity metals could differ
                                                                                                                        from metal to metal.
                                                                                                                                                                  (15 mts)

                                                                                     Step       3.3.2            ( ² Divide the class into four groups.
                                                                                                                   ² Provide the groups with exploration
                                                                                                                     instructions,table,demy papers and pastel.
                                                                                                                   ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration.
                                                                                                                   ² Prepare them to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                                                                                        (60 mts)
                                                                                     Step       3.3.3            ( ² Get each group to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                                   ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to
                                                                                                                     elaborate on the presentation.
² Get the other groups to propose constructive sugges
                                                                                                 tions,
                                                                                     ² Elaborate highlighting the following points.
                                                                                       ² When Mg,Al,Zn,Fe and Cu metals are kept in the air
                                                                                          for a short time there is no observable change.
                                                                                       ² When Mg is heated it burns with a glowing flame.
                                                                                       ² When Al, Zn, Fe and Cu are heated in air they loose
                                                                                          their shine.
                                                                                       ² When Mg, Al,Zn,Fe, and Cu are heated in air it         re
                                                                                          acts with the oxygen in the air and forms the oxide of
                                                                                          he metal.
                                                                                              Eg: 2Mg(s)+O2(g) → 2MgO(s)
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                       ² Mg metals reacts very slowly with cold water releas
                                                                                          ing gas bubbles.
                                                                                       ² Al,Zn,Fe and Cu do not show any observable
                                                                                          reaction with cold water ,in a short time.
                                                                                       ² Mg reacts some what vigorously with hot water
                                                                                          releasing gas bubbles.
                                                                                       ² Al and Zn reacts very slowly with hot water releasing
                                                                                          gas bubbles.
                                                                                       ² Fe and Cu does not show any visible reaction with
                                                                                          hot water,in a short time.
                                                                                       ² When Mg,Al and Zn reacts with water,hydrogen gas
                                                                                          is released forming the hydroxide of the metal.
                                                                                              Eg Mg(s)+2H2O(l) → Mg(OH)2(aq)+H2(g)
                                                                                       ² Mg,Al,Zn and Fe reacts with dilute acids releasing
                                                                                          gas bubbles.
                                                                                              Eg Mg(s)+2HCl(aq) → MgCl2(aq)+H2(g)
                                                                                       ² Cu does not react with dilute acids.
                                                                                       ² Due high reactivity of Na ,it is dangerous to heat the
                                                                                          metal in air or react it with acids/Hot water.
                                                                                       ² A metal whose reactivity is high could displace a
                                                                                          metal whose reactivity is less from an aqueous
                                                                                          solution of it.
                                                                                              Eg: Fe(s)+Cu2+(aq) → Fe2+(aq)+Cu(s)
                                                                                       ² It is possible to arrange the metals in their order of
                                                                                          reactivity in a series.
                                                                                              Cu<Fe<Zn<Al<Mg<Na
                                                                                        ² The metal series arranged acorrding to decreas
                                                                                       ing reacrivity, is known as the activity series
                                                                                        ² Scientists have develope the activiry series , by
                                                                                       including metals explore and in addition the other
                                                                                          metals as follows
.




                                                                                             ² The metal series arranged according to decreasing
                                                                                                  reactivity,is known as the activity series.
                                                                                             ² Scientists have developed the activity series, by
                                                                                               including metals explored and in addition the other
                                                                                               metals as follows.


                                                                                                                                           K

                                                                                                                   Na

                                                                                                                                           Ca
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                            Na                    Mg

                                                                                            Mg                     Al

                                                                                                                   Zn
                                                                                            Al

                                                                                            Zn                     Fe
                                                                                                                                           Sn
                                                                                            Fe

                                                                                            Cu                                             Pb

                                                                                            Au                    Cu

                                                                                                                                           Hg
                                                                                         Exploring
                                                                                          metal                                            Ag

                                                                                                                                            Pt

                                                                                                                  Au

                                                                                                                                       Introduced
                                                                                                                 Build up
                                                                                                                 activity                metal
                                                                                                                  series




                                                                                             ² Activity series is useful when studying about metals.
Criteria for assessment and evaluation

                                                                                     ² Explanes how the activity of two metals could be compaired
                                                                                     ² Accepts that sequential arrangement of metals in the series developed, and the activity series
                                                                                       in agrement.
                                                                                     ² Compair the activity of two matals experimentaly.
                                                                                     ² Come to conclutions basing observations
                                                                                     ² Able to observe the effect of a factor by controlling the
                                                                                         variables.
                                                                                                                                                                      Annex 3.3.1
                                                                                                            Instructions for setting up of work stations
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     ² Set up four work stations for activities.
                                                                                     ² Provide the four work stations with the following materials.
                                                                                       ² Boiling tube
                                                                                        ² Two test tubes
                                                                                        ² Test tube stand
                                                                                        ² Test tube holder
                                                                                       ² Bunsen burner
                                                                                        ² Pieces of sandpaper
                                                                                       ² Small Scissor
                                                                                        ² Cold water and hot water
                                                                                       ² Two test tube containing 10 cm3 of CuSO4 solution
                                                                                     ² Provide the work stations with one of the following
                                                                                       ² Six pieces each of Mg and Al
                                                                                       ² Six pieces each of Al and Zn
                                                                                       ² Six pieces each of Zn and Fe
                                                                                       ² Six pieces each of Fe and Cu
                                                                                        (Each of these metals must be of the same size as a 2 cm length of Mg)
Instructions for group exploration

                                                                                      ² For exploration you are provided with one of the following metal groups.
                                                                                             ² Mg-Al
                                                                                             ² Al-Zn
                                                                                             ² Zn-Fe
                                                                                              ² Fe-Cu
                                                                                     ² Observe the reactivity of the metals seperately with the follwing
                                                                                     (cut the metal into small pieces when required)
                                                                                             ² Air
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                             ² Cold water
                                                                                             ² Hot water
                                                                                            ²Dilute Hydrochloric acid
                                                                                             ²CuSO4 Solution
                                                                                     ² From your observations compare the reactivity of the two metals.
                                                                                     ² Develop with a discussion a series in the ascending order of reactivity of the two metals
                                                                                       provided,along with sodium and gold.
                                                                                     ² Be prepared to present your findings to the class.
Competency             3.0 ( Use chemical changes suitably to fulfil necessities
                                                                                                                  in life

                                                                                     Competency level       3.4   ( Use suitable methods for extraction of metals
                                                                                     Activity               3.4   ( Let us find about methods for extraction of metals.

                                                                                     Time                      ( 120 minutes
                                                                                     Quality inputs            ( ² Piece of Lead,Lead monoxide,blow pipe,charcoal block
                                                                                                                    and bunsen burner.
                                                                                                                 ² Two copies of instructions for group exploration given in
                                                                                                                    annex 3.4.1
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                 ² Two copies of article on "extraction of metals" in annex
                                                                                                                    3.4.2
                                                                                                                 ² Demy papers and pastel
                                                                                     Teaching learning process (
                                                                                     Step       3.4.1          ( ² Show the class a piece and lead monoxide
                                                                                                                 ² Ask from the student about the possibility of turning
                                                                                                                    lead oxide to lead.
                                                                                                                 ² Put some lead monoxide into a hole in the piece of
                                                                                                                    charcoal block,and direct the bunsen flame to the hole by
                                                                                                                    blowing through the blow pipe.
                                                                                                                 ² Allow students to observe the change.
                                                                                                                 ² Lead a discussion high lighting the follwing points.
                                                                                                                    ² Lead is formed by the dissociation of lead monoxide
                                                                                                                        by heat.
                                                                                                                    ² During extraction of some metals thermal methods
                                                                                                                        are used.
                                                                                                                    ² Other methods too are used for extraction of metals
                                                                                                                    ² When selecting a suitable method for extraction it is
                                                                                                                        important to consider the form in which it is available
                                                                                                                        in nature and the chemical activity of the metal
                                                                                                                                                           (15 mts).




                                                                                                                         69
Step   3.4.2   ( ² Divide the class into two groups.
                                                                                                      ² Provide the groups with the article on instructions for
                                                                                                        exploration ,demy papers and pastel

                                                                                                      ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration.
                                                                                                      ² Prepare them to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                                                                          (60 mts)
                                                                                     Step   3.4.3   ( ² Get each group to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                      ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to
                                                                                                        elaborate on the presentation.
                                                                                                      ² Get the other groups to propose constructive sugges
                                                                                                           tions,
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                      ² Summrize highlighting the following points.

                                                                                                          ² The following points are agreeable for metals at the
                                                                                                             top of the activity series.
                                                                                                          ² Reaction is very high
                                                                                                          ² Because they react fast with air and water they are
                                                                                                             kept either immersed in paraffin oil or imeared with a
                                                                                                             protective covering.
                                                                                                          ² They are available in nature as chloride of the metal.
                                                                                                          ² The metal is extracted mainly electrolysing the fused
                                                                                                             metal chloride.
                                                                                                          ² The following points are valid for metals at the middle
                                                                                                             of the activity series.
                                                                                                          ² Shows medium range of reactivity.
                                                                                                          ² Mainly available in nature ,as oxide of the metal
                                                                                                          ² Carbonate of the metal or Sulphide of the metal.
                                                                                                          ² Metal is extracted by thermal dissociation of
                                                                                                             oxides,Sulphides or Carbonates.
                                                                                                          ² The following points are valid for metals at the bottom
                                                                                                             of the activity series.
                                                                                                             ² Reactivity is very low.
                                                                                                             ² Available in nature as pure metals,not as com
                                                                                                               pounds.
                                                                                                             ² Extraction is by separating the metal from the soil
                                                                                                               particles by physical means.
                                                                                                                                                  (45 mts)




                                                                                                          70
Annex 3.4.1




                                                                                                             Criteria for assessment and evâlution

                                                                                     ² Explain the basic methods of extraction of metals.
                                                                                     ² Appreciates that there is a connection between the reactivity of the metal,from in which it is
                                                                                      available in nature ,and method of extraction
                                                                                     ² Correlate the place occupied by a certain metal in the activity series and its properties.
                                                                                     ² Gather facts by using reacting materials.
                                                                                     ² Present the facts collected in a way understood by the others.

                                                                                                                                                                        Annex 3.4.1

                                                                                     Instructions for Group exploration
                                                                                     ² You are expected to make a study of a metal group belonging to the activity series given
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                       below.
                                                                                                                         K
                                                                                                                         Na
                                                                                     ² Metals with high reactivity       Ca
                                                                                                                         Mg
                                                                                                                         Al


                                                                                                                           Zn
                                                                                                                           Fe
                                                                                     ² Metals with middle rate             Sn
                                                                                      of reactivity                        Pb
                                                                                                                           Cu

                                                                                                                           Hg
                                                                                     ² Metals with low reactivity          Ag
                                                                                                                           Pt
                                                                                                                           Au

                                                                                     ² Using the artical supplied to you,gather data according to the headings given below,about the
                                                                                       metal group assigned to you
                                                                                        ² Availability in nature
                                                                                         ² Method of extraction
                                                                                         ² How it is stored
                                                                                     ² Gather data about the metal gold under the headings given above,and compare with metals
                                                                                      assigned to you.
                                                                                     ² Be prepared to present your findings to the class.




                                                                                                                            71
Annex 3.4.2
                                                                                                                         Metal extraction

                                                                                     Ores in which the metal with present as the metal chloride

                                                                                                                       Main constituents          The metal extracted
                                                                                                 Ore
                                                                                                                       in the Ore

                                                                                          Sodium Chloride                NaCl                      Sodium

                                                                                          Potassium Chloride             KCl                       Potassium

                                                                                          Magnesium Chloride             MgCl2                     Magnisium
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                          Calcium Chloride               CaCl2                     Calcium




                                                                                     Ores in which the metal is present metal oxide

                                                                                                                       Much constituents
                                                                                               Types of Ore                                       The metal extractor
                                                                                                                       in the Ore
                                                                                              Haematite                 Fe2O3                      Iron
                                                                                              Magnatite                 Fe3O4                      Iron
                                                                                              Limonite                  Fe2O.2H2O                  Iron
                                                                                              Boxite                    Al2O3.2H2O                 Aluminium
                                                                                              Cuprite                   Cu2O3                      Copper
                                                                                              Tinstons                  SnO2                       Tin



                                                                                     Ores in which the metalis present as the metal carbonate


                                                                                                                      Main constitutent
                                                                                             Types of Ore                                         The metal extractor
                                                                                                                      in the Ore

                                                                                             Callamine                ZnCO3                       Zinc
                                                                                             Limestone                CaCO3                       Calcium
                                                                                             Malkite                  CuCO3.Cu(OH)2               Copper
                                                                                             Aturaite                 2CuCO3.Cu(OH)2              Copper
                                                                                             Magnasite                MgCO3                       Magnisium




                                                                                                                       72
Ores in which the metal is present as metal sulphide


                                                                                               Types of Ore                Main constituents           Metal extractor
                                                                                                                           in the Ore

                                                                                             Copper Pyrites                 CuFeS2                     Copper
                                                                                             Zincblent                      ZnS                        Zinc
                                                                                             Galena                         PbS                        Lead
                                                                                             Zinabar                        HgS                        Mercury
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     Methods of Extraction
                                                                                     Electrolysis of Fused compound


                                                                                                          The compound that is electrolysed to extract the metal and
                                                                                           Metal
                                                                                                          the chemical reaction that take place

                                                                                                        Available in nature as Sodium Chloride. In the Downs process
                                                                                                        Sodium Chloride id fused and electrolysed. For it to liquify easily it is
                                                                                                        mixed with Calcium Chloride.

                                                                                                                   →
                                                                                                              NaCl → Na+ + Cl-
                                                                                                                    →
                                                                                         Sodium               CaCl2 →            Ca2+ + 2Cl-
                                                                                                           ² At the anode Cl2 if formed.
                                                                                                           ² At the cathode Na metal is formed.
                                                                                                            (the diagrames mention under Sodium extraction)




                                                                                                         Available in nature as KCl. The metal is obtained by
                                                                                        Potassium        electrolysing the fused Chloride.

                                                                                                        Available as CaCO3 in nature. By adding Hydrochloric acid to
                                                                                                        this, CaCl2 is formed. Fused CaCl2 is electrolysed in Graphaite
                                                                                                        crucible.
                                                                                         Calcium          ² Metallic Calcium is deposited on the cathode.
                                                                                                          ² Chlorine is evolved at the Anode.



                                                                                                                          73
The compound that is electrolysed to extracts the metal
                                                                                          Metal
                                                                                                              and chemical reactions take place


                                                                                                       Magnesium Chloride is present in nature as Carnalite in sold deposites;
                                                                                       Magnesium       Fused Carnalite is electrolysed in Iron vessels. Here mostly MgCl2
                                                                                                       undergo electrolysis.


                                                                                                       Aluminiumis present naturally as Boxite. (Al2O3.2H2O) This is purified
                                                                                       Aluminium       and fused , then it is desolve in purified and fused Cryolite (3NaF.AlF3)
                                                                                                       It is electrolysed.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     2. Reduction of the Ore with Carbon or Carbon Monoxide


                                                                                         Metal                     Reactions and the way reduction is performed

                                                                                                       Th Ore Hematite (Fe2O3) is roasted , and the oxide is obtained without
                                                                                                       any vapourising material, These oxide is heated in a blast furnance
                                                                                         Iron          reduced by Carbon monoxide.

                                                                                                       Fe2O3 + 3CO → 2Fe + 3CO2
                                                                                                       (The diagram is mention under Iron extraction)
                                                                                                       Zinc blend (ZnS) or Calomine (ZnCO3) is roasted in air
                                                                                                       convert to the oxide
                                                                                         Zinc
                                                                                                       2ZnS + 3O2 → 2ZnO + 2 SO2              this oxide is mixed
                                                                                                       with Coke powder and reduced.
                                                                                                       ZnO + C         Zn + CO

                                                                                                       The Tinstone (SnO2) Ore is roasted in air and later toasted with
                                                                                          Tin          Carbon.

                                                                                                       SnO2 + 2C         Sn + 2CO

                                                                                                        Galena (PbS) first converted to Leadoxide.

                                                                                                        2PbS + 3O2            2PbO + 2SO2
                                                                                         Lead           Later , Lead is obtained as in the reaction given below.
                                                                                                        PbO + C                Pb + CO
                                                                                                        PbO + CO               Pb + CO2

                                                                                                                       74
Extraction of Sodium

                                                                                        Sodium is extrcted by Electrolysing fused Sodium chloride. To reduced the melting point of
                                                                                        Sodium Chloride to 600 0C, it is mixed with CaCl2. The fused solution is electrolysed by using
                                                                                        the Down's cell.



                                                                                                                              Chlorine gas



                                                                                          Fused Sodium metal                                                   Fused Sodium metal
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                                                              Cylindrical steel
                                                                                                                                                              cathode



                                                                                                                                                                 Steel diaphragm to
                                                                                     Fused Sodium Chlo-                                                          avoide the reaction of
                                                                                     ride and Calcium                                                            Sodium and Chlorine.
                                                                                     Chloride mixture.                                                            Carbon (Graphite)
                                                                                                                                                                  anode



                                                                                                                                Down's cell
                                                                                        The cathode is made of steel and the anode is of Graphite. During electrolysis the following
                                                                                        reactions take place at the electrodes.

                                                                                              At cathode
                                                                                                             Na+ + e               Na

                                                                                              At anode       2Cl-              Cl2 + 2e




                                                                                                                              75
Iron Extraction



                                                                                     The Ore that is frequently used is hematite which contains Iron (111)
                                                                                     Moisture,Sulphur.Arsenic are present in the ore as impurities.To remove these the ore is
                                                                                     roasted in air.Hematite is then mixed coke. Coke is a type of coal which produced more heat.
                                                                                     For this the Ore is mixed with Limestone. The heat required is supplied by coke. Limestones
                                                                                     remove sand in the Iron. This reaction taken place in a blast furnace.



                                                                                                Iron Ore,
                                                                                                Coke and
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                Limestones
                                                                                                             gas impurities                gas impurities




                                                                                                     Hot air in                                    Hot air in


                                                                                                       Liquid Iron out

                                                                                                                            Blast Furnace
                                                                                     The diagram given above show a blast furnace. The mixture is introduced to the furnace at the
                                                                                     top. The temperature in this furnace is more than 1500 0C. The chemical reaction taking place
                                                                                     could be shown step by step as shown below.

                                                                                       1. The Oxygen in the air that enter the furnace with coke react to form Carbon dioxide.
                                                                                                   C + O2                  CO2
                                                                                       2. This CO2 reacts further with Coke and forms CO gas.
                                                                                                   CO2 + C            2 CO
                                                                                       3. The CO gas reacts with Iron (III) Oxide and form Iron.
                                                                                                   Fe2O3 + 3CO             2Fe + 3CO2
                                                                                       4. In addition to CO Carbon too reacts with Iron Oxide to form Iron.
                                                                                               Fe2O3 + 3C             2Fe + 3CO
                                                                                                                              76
Extraction of Gold

                                                                                     Metals Gold, Platinum, Silver and Mercury usually do not react with other elements chemically
                                                                                     to form compounds. These metals are called inactive metals and they are found in nature as the
                                                                                     elements.

                                                                                     But it is mixed with gravel, sand and other soil particals. The has to be seperated from the
                                                                                     impurities. Gold could be obtained from Quart Ore, river sand or gravel as small peices. Here
                                                                                     the most simple mathode to extract the Gold is to sieve the river sand and gravel. Seeving is a
                                                                                     process where gravitational mathodes dependent on dencity. During seeving heavy gold metal
                                                                                     gets collected at the bottom of the vessel and the gravel and sand gets washed out by the mining
                                                                                     wates. Directing the water spout at the gold containes and gold could be extracted.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     Another mathod is quarts is powdred and mixed with water , is passed over amalgamated cop-
                                                                                     per electrodes. In this process gold is dissolved at the surface of the plate. Later the Mercury is
                                                                                     bistilled.




                                                                                                                 A piece of rock which contains gold




                                                                                                                            77
Competency       3.0 : Use chemical change suitable to fulfil necessity of life


                                                                                     Competency
                                                                                            Level     3.5   : Control the rate of chemical reaction

                                                                                     Activity         3.5   : Let us investigate about the factors affecting the rate of
                                                                                                              chemical reaction.

                                                                                     Time                   : 210 mts.

                                                                                     Quality Inputs         : • Spakle, Sandalwood stic and a box of matches
                                                                                                              • Four copies of the two page artical on instructions for
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                exploration given in annex 3.5.1
                                                                                                              • Four work station arranged according to instrution given
                                                                                                                in annex 3.5.2
                                                                                                              • Demy papers and pastels

                                                                                     Teaching Learning Process

                                                                                     Step 3.5.1               • Ignit the Sparkle, Sandalwood stic at the same time and
                                                                                                                direct the students to observe.
                                                                                                              • Discuss about the students observations.
                                                                                                              • Lead a discussion highlighting the following points.
                                                                                                                • When Sparkle and Sandalwood stic were ignited the
                                                                                                                   chemicals present in them burn.
                                                                                                                • The rate of burning of Spakle is greater than the rate of
                                                                                                                   burning of Sandalwood stic.
                                                                                                                • There are different factors which could affect the rate
                                                                                                                   of a reaction.
                                                                                                                • The rate of a chemical reaction could be decided by the
                                                                                                                   time taken to decrease a certain quantity of reactants or
                                                                                                                   the production of a certain quantity of the product.
                                                                                                                                                               (15 mts.)

                                                                                     Step 3.5.2             : • Divide the class into four groups.
                                                                                                              • Provide the group with instrutions for exploration, demy
                                                                                                                pastels.
                                                                                                              • Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration.
                                                                                                              • Prepare them to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                                                                              (60 mts. )
Step 3.5.3   : • get each group to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                    • Give the first opportunity to the respective groups to
                                                                                                      elaborate on the presentation.
                                                                                                    • get the other groups to propose contructive suggestions.
                                                                                                    • Summerize highlighting the following points.
                                                                                                      • In the experiment it is necessary to keep the factors
                                                                                                         constant other than the factor which we are experiment-
                                                                                                         ing
                                                                                                      • In a reactionwhere a gaseous product is obtained to
                                                                                                         determine the rate of reaction the volume of gas liber-
                                                                                                         ated at a definite time interval or the time taken to
                                                                                                         liberate equal volums of the gas could be measured.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                      • In the reaction between Magnesium and Acid euqal
                                                                                                         weights of cleaned pieces of Magnesium ribbon must
                                                                                                         be used.
                                                                                                      • When the effect of temperature is determined, equal
                                                                                                         sizes of clean iron nails, equal volums of KMnO4,
                                                                                                         H2SO4 acidmust be used and the time taken for the
                                                                                                         violet colour to disappear must be compaired.
                                                                                                      • When acids are used , precautionary measures for safty
                                                                                                         must be taken.
                                                                                                      • When considering the effect of temperature the differ-
                                                                                                         ence in the temperatures of the solutions must be about
                                                                                                         150 C .
                                                                                                      • When Calcium Carbonate (Marble Chips) are used,
                                                                                                         powder or crystals of equal weight must be taken.
                                                                                                      • For the Hydrogen peroxide dissociation reaction a
                                                                                                         recent production of Hydrogen Peroxide must be used.
                                                                                                      • In the experiment to find the effect of concentration on
                                                                                                         rate of reaction the set up given below could be used.

                                                                                                          Mg ribbon                                              Glass Tube
                                                                                                                             987654321   987654321
                                                                                                                                         987654321
                                                                                                          Rubber             987654321
                                                                                                                             987654321   987654321
                                                                                                                                         987654321
                                                                                                                             987654321
                                                                                                                             987654321   987654321
                                                                                                                                         987654321               H2
                                                                                                          Bung               987654321




                                                                                                               HCl

                                                                                                                                                     987654321
                                                                                                                                                     987654321
                                                                                                                                                     987654321
                                                                                                                                                     987654321
                                                                                                                                                     987654321
                                                                                                                                                     987654321



                                                                                                                       (i)        (ii)      (iii)       (iv)
• In the experiment to determine the effect of temperature
                                                                                        on rate of reaction the experiment to be set up as given
                                                                                        below




                                                                                                                      Cleaned
                                                                                                                      Iron nail
                                                                                                                   KMnO4 $H2SO4
                                                                                                                     Solution

                                                                                                      (i)                                   (ii)
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                                  0
                                                                                             At room temperature           At 60 C temperature

                                                                                     • In the experiment to determine the effect of physical
                                                                                         nature of the reactants the experiment could be set up
                                                                                         as given below.




                                                                                           HCl

                                                                                                                                            CO2
                                                                                        CaCO3

                                                                                     • In the experiment to determine the effect of catalysts the
                                                                                         experiment could be set up as given below


                                                                                                             O2


                                                                                                                                  Syringe


                                                                                                   H2O2




                                                                                          MnO2 or Sand




                                                                                                                                       (45 mts.)
Step 3.5.4            : • Set up earlier groups and direct them to work stations
                                                                                                             • Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration.
                                                                                                             • Prepare them to present their findings to the whole class.
                                                                                                                                                             (45 mts.)

                                                                                     Step 3.5.5            : • Get groups to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                             • Give the first opportunity for elaboration to respective
                                                                                                               groupwhich made the presentation
                                                                                                             • Get other groups to propose contructive suggestions.
                                                                                                             • summerize highlighting the following points.
                                                                                                               • When Mg reacts with HCl with different concentrations,
                                                                                                                  the time taken to liberate a constant volume of gas de
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                  creased with tthe increase in concentration.
                                                                                                               • concentration affects the rate of reaction.
                                                                                                               • when Fe reacts with Acidic KMnO4of same concentration,
                                                                                                                  with increase in temperature the time taken for the violet
                                                                                                                  colour in the solution to disappear was less.
                                                                                                               • Temperarure affects the rate of reaction.
                                                                                                               • The time taken for a definit volume of CO2 to liberate when
                                                                                                                  powdered CaCo3 is less than when the CaCo3 is in the
                                                                                                                  cryslline form.
                                                                                                               • Physical nature of the reactants affect the rate of reaction.
                                                                                                               • When MnO2 is used, the dissociation of H2O2 increases.
                                                                                                               • MnO2 acts as a catalyst during dissociation of H2O2
                                                                                                               • Catalyst affects the rate of reaction.
                                                                                                               • A catalyst is a constituent itself undergoing a chemical
                                                                                                                  change or a decrease in weight.
                                                                                                               • When gases reacts if there is an increase of presure the
                                                                                                                  frequency of gas molecules colliding increase and as a
                                                                                                                  result the rate of reaction increase.
                                                                                                               • It is possoble to control the rate of a reaction as required
                                                                                                                  by controlling concentration, temperarure, physical nature,
                                                                                                                  catalysts and pressure.
                                                                                                               • Controlling the rate of chemical reactions it is possible to
                                                                                                                  increase the productivity and efficieancy in day to activities
                                                                                                                  of chemical production.

                                                                                                                                                              (45 mts.)
                                                                                     Criteria for assesment and evaluation

                                                                                                                 • Name and explane the factors affecting the rate of a
                                                                                                                   reaction.
                                                                                                                 • Accepts the fact that by controlling the factors affecting the
                                                                                                                   rate of a reaction, the reaction rate could be kept at an
                                                                                                                   optimum level.
• Set up experiments and test the factors affecting the rate of
                                  chemical changes.
                              • Conducts activities according to a plan.
                              • Develope self creations by considering the opinions of
                                  others.
                                                                               Annex 3.5.1
                    Instructions for group explorations - handout 1

• Your group is assigned to find the effect of the following factors on the rate of a chemical
  reaction.
                          • Concentration
                          • Temperature
                          • Physical state
                          • catalyst
• Device an experiment to find the effect of the factor using the instrutions and other materials
  provides in the work station.
• Be prepaired to present your plan to the class

                    Instructions for group explorations - handout 2

• Focus your attention to any proposed changes to the plan you submitted.
• Set up apperatus according to plan and carry out experiment.
• Report your observations.
• Get ready to present your findings to class.
                                                                                   Annex 3.5.2

                     Instrutions to set up work stations

Work station I - Concentration
    • 3 pieces of Mg ribbon ( 3 cm )
    • Sand papers
    • 3 Boiling tubes
    • Glass tubing ( about 10 cm)
    • Rubber stopper
    • HCl solution of 2 mol dm -3, 1 mol dm-3, 0.5 mol dm-3 concentrations
    • Stop watch
Work station II - Temperature
    • 2 Fe nails
    • KMnO4 solution ( 0.1 mol dm-3)
    • H2SO4 acid solution (1 mol dm-3)
    • Water trough containing hot water.
    • Two boiling tubes.
    • Measuring cylinder.
    • Sand paper
    • Thermometer
    • Stop watch
Work station III - Physical nature

                                                                                         • Equal weight of Calcium Carbonate crystals and powder.
                                                                                         • Dilute HCl solution
                                                                                         • Conical flask
                                                                                         • Delivery tube
                                                                                         • Rubber stopper
                                                                                         • Thistle Funnel
                                                                                         • Measuring cylinder
                                                                                         • Water trough
                                                                                         • Beehive shelf
                                                                                         • Stop watch
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     Work station IV - Catalyst

                                                                                         • Conical flask
                                                                                         • Delivery tube
                                                                                         • Hydrogen Peroxide solution
                                                                                         • Manganese dioxide/ Sand
                                                                                         • Syringe ( glass)
                                                                                         • Measuring cylinder
                                                                                         • Rubber stopper
Competency          3.0 :   Use chemical changes suitable to fulfil necessities of life


                                                                                     Competency level 3.6 :      Take steps to prevent metal corrosion

                                                                                     Activity            3.6 :   Let us find ways to conserve metal by minimizing corrosion.

                                                                                     Time                    :   120 mts.

                                                                                     Quality inputs          :   • Potassium fericyanide and Phenolpthalein
                                                                                                                 • Small quantity of freshly prepared FeSO4 and NaOH
                                                                                                                 • 3 copies of artical on instructions for exploration in annex
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                   3.6.1
                                                                                                                 • 3 work stations arranged according to instructions in annex
                                                                                                                   3.6.2
                                                                                                                 • Demy paper and pastel

                                                                                     Teaching learning
                                                                                            process          :   • Inquire about their precious knowledge on rusting of iron.
                                                                                                                 • Add to the freshly prepared FeSO4 solution a few drop of
                                                                                                                   potassium ferricyanide and a few drop of phenolpthalien to
                                                                                                                   NaOH solution and show the students.
                                                                                                                 • Lead a discussion highlighting the following points.
                                                                                                                   • Rusting is due to water and Oxygen reacting with Iron
                                                                                                                   • Acids and salts increase rusting where as bases retard
                                                                                                                      rusting.
                                                                                                                   • Initial reactions during rusting could be given as follows.
                                                                                                                      Fs(s)        Fe2+(aq) + 2e (Oxidation)
                                                                                                                      2H2O(l) + O2(g) + 4e          4OH-(aq) (reduction)
                                                                                                                   • When Potassium fericyanide is added to a solution of Fe2+
                                                                                                                      solution there is a deep blue colours.
                                                                                                                   • Potassium ferricyanide could be used as an indicator to
                                                                                                                      detect Fe2+ ions in a medium.
                                                                                                                   • When Phenolphthalein is added to a solution containing
                                                                                                                      (OH)- there is a pink colour.
                                                                                                                   • Phenolphthalein could be used as an indicator to detect
                                                                                                                      (OH)- ions in a medium.
                                                                                                                                                                 (15 mts.)

                                                                                     Step 3.6.2              :   • Divide the class into four groups.
                                                                                                                 • Provide the groups with instrutiions for exploration, demy
                                                                                                                   papers and pastels.
                                                                                                                 • Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration.
                                                                                                                 • Prepare them to present their findings to the whole class
                                                                                                                                                                 (60 mts)
Step 3.6.3   :   • Get the group to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                      • Give the first oppotunity for elaboration to the respective
                                                                                                        group which made the presentation
                                                                                                      • Get the other groups to propose constructive suggestions.
                                                                                                      • Summerize highlighting the following points.
                                                                                                        • Where the medium turned blue, Iron corrode and forms
                                                                                                           Fe++
                                                                                                        • Where the medium turned pink, OH- are formed.

                                                                                                                                            Pink             Pink
                                                                                                             Mg   654321
                                                                                                                  654321
                                                                                                                  654321   Zn     7654321
                                                                                                                                  7654321
                                                                                                                                  7654321    Cu    7654321
                                                                                                                                                   7654321    Pb    7654321
                                                                                                                                                                    7654321
                                                                                                                  654321          7654321          7654321          7654321
                                                                                                                                  7654321          7654321          7654321
                                                                                                                                                   7654321          7654321
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                           Pink                               Blue



                                                                                                        • Where the Iron is in contact with metals above Iron the
                                                                                                          following occur
                                                                                                          • Iron does not corrode.
                                                                                                          • The matal which has the higher reactivity acts as the
                                                                                                              anode and undergo corrosion due to Oxidation.
                                                                                                          • Iron acts as the cathode.
                                                                                                          • At the iron nail which acts as the cathode there is a pink
                                                                                                              colour due to the production of (OH)- iron.
                                                                                                          • These areas are called ‘cathode areas’
                                                                                                          • When the metal which has a higher reactivity acts as the
                                                                                                              anode and sacrifies itself and prevents iron from rusting,
                                                                                                              it is called cathode protection.
                                                                                                              eg. applying zink on iron surface. (galvanizing)
                                                                                                          • When any two metals in the activity series are in contact
                                                                                                              with one another, the metal which has a higher reactivity
                                                                                                              corrode protecting the meatal of lower of reactivity
                                                                                                              metal which corrodes is called the sacrificing metal.
                                                                                                          • When metals which are below iron in the activity series
                                                                                                              are in contact with iron the following take place.
                                                                                                              • Iron corrodes vigorously.
                                                                                                              • Iron acts as the anode and forms Fe2+ by oxidation.
                                                                                                        • The blue coloured area near iron nail, which acts as the
                                                                                                          anode is called the anode area.
                                                                                                        • When a metal is coated to prevent it from coming in
                                                                                                          contact with factors which are necessary for corrosion, and
                                                                                                          preventing iron from becoming the anode, it is called anose
                                                                                                          protection.
                                                                                                         eg. coating Iron surface with Sn, paint, grease.
• It is possible to keep the ions formed at the cathode and
                                                                                                                    the anode by using a jelly medium instead of a liquid
                                                                                                                    medium in the places where they are formed in a experi
                                                                                                                    ments where rusting of iron is considered as anelectro
                                                                                                                    chemical change.
                                                                                                                 • The process of rusting of Iron could be explained by the
                                                                                                                    following reactions.
                                                                                                                    Fe(s)         Fe2+(aq) + 2e
                                                                                                                    2H2O (l) + O2 (g) + 4e         4(OH)- (aq)
                                                                                                                    Fe(OH)2 (aq) + O2(g)         Fe2O3.H2O(s)
                                                                                                                 • Iron rust is a hydrate Ferric oxide, having a reddish brown
                                                                                                                    color, a number of water molecules in it vary. As such the
                                                                                                                    compound is indicated as follows.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                        Fe2O3.xH2O(s)


                                                                                                                                                             (45 mts.)



                                                                                     Criteria for assesment and evalution

                                                                                                              • Explain anodic protection and cathodic protection which
                                                                                                                prevents rusting of Iron.
                                                                                                              • Appreciate that metallic corrosion could be controlled.
                                                                                                              • Experiments how metals with different reactivity affect corro-
                                                                                                                sion of Iron
                                                                                                              • Arrive at inferences from observation.
                                                                                                              • Use demostrations as the occasion demands.
Instruction for group exploration                                             Annex 3.6.3

                                                                                                               • Your group is assigned to study about rusting of Iron nails
                                                                                                                 under one of the following conditions.
                                                                                                                 • When in contact with Mg and when in contact with Sn
                                                                                                                 • When in contact with Al and when in contact with Pb
                                                                                                                 • When in contact with Zn and when in contact with Cu
                                                                                                               • prepair a set up to investigate the rusting of Iron nails when the
                                                                                                                 two metals are kept in a jelly medium (Prearation of a jelly
                                                                                                                 medium is given below)
                                                                                                               • Device a suitable control experiment.
                                                                                                                                                       Petri dish
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                         43210987654321
                                                                                                                         43210987654321
                                                                                                                         43210987654321
                                                                                                                         43210987654321                Iron nail
                                                                                                                         43210987654321
                                                                                                                         43210987654321
                                                                                                                         43210987654321
                                                                                                                         43210987654321                Metal piece

                                                                                                                                                       Jelly medium




                                                                                                               • Forecast what observations you expect to get after one day.
                                                                                                               • Take down your observation on the following day.
                                                                                                               • Arrive at conclutions about rusting of Iron, considering the
                                                                                                                 place occupied by the metals subjected to the experiment.
                                                                                                               • discuss why it is necessary to use a jelly medium instead of an
                                                                                                                 aquaious solution, and the jelly medium should not be allowed
                                                                                                                 to have air bubbles.
                                                                                                               • Explain the following phenomena scientifically basing your
                                                                                                                 conclusion.
                                                                                                                 • when an Iron bucket coated with Zn (Galvanized) gets
                                                                                                                     scrached rusting is controlled and could be used for a long
                                                                                                                     time.
                                                                                                                 • When food container made of Iron sheet and coated with
                                                                                                                     Sn get scrached it undergoes rusting very rapidly.
How to prepare the jelly medium

                                                                                     Dissolve a small quantity of NaCl in 250 cm3 of water, add 5g of Agar and while stirring well
                                                                                     boil for about 10 mts. Once the mixture is viscous add 2 cm3 of phenolphthalein, take away
                                                                                     the beaker from the burner stir and when it is some what cool add 1 cm3 of Potacium
                                                                                     ferricyanide and stir further. Before it gets solidified add to petri dishes with Iron nails and
                                                                                     allowed to cool. (See that air bubbles do not get into the jelly). It ispossible to use poedered
                                                                                     sago instead of jelly.


                                                                                                                                                                        Annex 3.6.2
                                                                                                        Instrution for preparation of work stations.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     • Keep the following materials and prepare 4 work stations.

                                                                                              • work station - 1 - Three Iron nails (7 cm) , sand paper, 3 petri dishes, Mg and Sn
                                                                                                                     metal strips 1 piece (size 0.5 cm x 5 cm)

                                                                                             • work station - 2 - Three Iron nails (7 cm), sand paper, 3 petri dishes, Al and Pb
                                                                                                                    metal strips 1 piece (size 0.5 cm x 5 cm)

                                                                                             • work station - 3 - Three Iron nails (7 cm), sand paper, 3 petri dishes, Zn and Cu
                                                                                                                    metal strips 1 piece (size 0.5 cm x 5 cm)

                                                                                     • Keep at each work station materials required to prepare a jelly medium.
Competency          3.0 : Use chemical changes suitably to fulfil necessities of life


                                                                                     Comptency level 3.7 : Control burning as appropriate to the occasion

                                                                                     Activity            3.7 : Let us look, find out about burning

                                                                                     Time                    : 120 mts.

                                                                                     Quality inputs          : • Three lengh wise folded half sheet papers, so that they are
                                                                                                                 easily ignited.
                                                                                                               • Three copies of instrutions for exploration article given in
                                                                                                                 annex 3.7.1
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                               • Three work stations arranged according to the instructions
                                                                                                                 given in annex 3.7.2
                                                                                                               • Demy paper and pastel
                                                                                     Teaching learning
                                                                                               Process       :

                                                                                     Step                3.7.1   • Ignite one of the lengh wise folded papers and cut just below
                                                                                                                   the flame so that the flame is extinguished.
                                                                                                                 • Moistened the second paper up to two third of it with
                                                                                                                   coloured water. Ignite the paper at the dry end and display it
                                                                                                                   to the students.
                                                                                                                 • With the third paper leave the ignited end on a sheet and cover
                                                                                                                   it with an empty jam bottle, allow it to extinguish.
                                                                                                                 • Lead a discussion highlighting the following points.
                                                                                                                   • The flame extinguished as a result of the burning paper
                                                                                                                       being cut and removed ( combustible subtance isremoved)
                                                                                                                   • The flame extinguished as a result of the moistend part of
                                                                                                                       the paper did not reach the temperature required (Ignition
                                                                                                                       temperature) for it to burn.
                                                                                                                   • By covering with the jam bottle the supporter of combus-
                                                                                                                       tion (Oxygen) was prevented from reaching the burning
                                                                                                                       subtance.
                                                                                                                   • Three factors essential for conbustion are availability of a
                                                                                                                       combustible subtance, it should reach the ignition tempera-
                                                                                                                       ture and the gas which is the supportes of combustion.
                                                                                                                   • A chemical reaction where a combutible subtance react
                                                                                                                       with a gaseous supporter of combustion liberating heat and
                                                                                                                       light is called combustiion.
                                                                                                                   • During combustion, the carbon and hydrogen in the com
                                                                                                                       bustible react with Oxygen in the air forming the products of
                                                                                                                       combustion.
                                                                                                                   • Paper is manufactured by plant materials which basically
                                                                                                                       contains carbon and hydrogen.
• During combustion which carbon react with Oxygen,
                         CO2 is formed and when Oxygen react with hydrogen
                         H2O is formed.

                                                                        (15 mts.)

Step   3.7.2 : • Devide the class into three groups
               • Provide the groups with instrutions for exploration, demy
                 paper and pastal
               • Assign the tasks and engage groups in exploration.
               • Preparee them to present their findings to the whole class.
                                                              (60 mts.)

Step   3.7.3 : • Get groups to present their findings to the class.
               • Give the first oppotunity for elaboration to the respective
                 group which made the presentation.
               • Get other groups to propose construtive suggestions.
               • Summerize highlighting the following points.
                 • when a candle is burnin, the solid wax melt and it travels
                    upwards along the wick and gets evaporated. This wax
                    vapour gets dissociate due to heat and these react with the
                    supporters of combustion in the surrounding air and pro-
                    duce light and heat.
                 • In the candle flame there are three zones, which could be
                    observed clearly.
                 • The inner most zone in the non-luminous zone, it contains a
                    mixture of wax vapour and air.
                 • The temperature in the non-luminous flame is low, when
                    compared to the other zones.
                 • The zone outside the non-luminous zone is the luminous
                    zone, here the wax gets dissociated and Carbon monoxide
                    and Hydrogen gas are produced and start to form Carbon
                    dioxide and water.
                 • The tenperature in this zon is higher than the temperature in
                    the non-luminous zone.
                 • In the luminous zone, the gases containing Carbon gets
                    dissociated forming free Carbon particals.
                 • The Carbon particals get into the incandescent state and
                    produce the endemic yellow colour of the luminous zone
                    giving out light.
                 • The zone outside the luminous zone, at the base of the flame
                    a blue colour is clearly visible, but at the top it is invisible. In
                    this invisible zone the remaining Carbon monoxide and
                    Hydrogen burn.
                 • In the Kerosene lamp flame,two clearly visible zones, the
                    non-luminous and the luminous are seen.
• In the wine spirit flame, luminous flame is not visible.

                                                                                     • In the bunsen burner flame, inner most is the non-luminous
                                                                                       zone and outer to that the dark blue and light blue zones in
                                                                                       sequence and outer most is the invisible zone.
                                                                                     • In the bunsen burner at the base the combustible subtance
                                                                                       is made to mix with air and then it is allowed to burn at the
                                                                                       top.
                                                                                     • A combustion reaction in which when there is a supply of
                                                                                       required quantity of Oxigen, the combustion substance
                                                                                       Carbon is completly changed to Carbon dioxide. It is called
                                                                                       complete combustion.
                                                                                     • A combustion reaction in which when there is a limited
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                       supply of Oxigen, part of the Carbon in the combustible
                                                                                       subtance is converted to Carbon monoxide, it is called
                                                                                       parcial combustion.
                                                                                     • In the bunsen burner there is a supply of required quantity
                                                                                       of Oxigen, the fuel undergo complte combustion.
                                                                                     • Apart from three types considered earlier, a flame of a
                                                                                       higher could be got from the bunsen burner.
                                                                                     • When combustion takes place in a limited supply of Oxigen
                                                                                       the unburnt Carbon particals are given out from the flame,
                                                                                       which could be detected as soot by holding a ceremic brick
                                                                                       above the flame.
                                                                                     • When you hold a wire mesh transversely acroos the flame,
                                                                                       due to the absorption of heat by the wire mesh the flame is
                                                                                       not seen above the wire mesh for sometime.
                                                                                     • When yoy hold a glass sheet across the flame in the patch
                                                                                       that forms at the centre unburnt fuel is deposited.
                                                                                     • When you hold a fine metal piece to the outer most zone of
                                                                                       the flame, there is a reduction in temperature and as a result
                                                                                       there is partial combustion and turns luminous for a short
                                                                                       time.
                                                                                     • When you bring a flame to the vapour of an extinguished
                                                                                       flame soon after it was extinguished, the vapour catches
                                                                                       fire.
                                                                                     • In ovens where there are methods to control the supply of
                                                                                       Oxigen and fuel, it possible to obtain a flame which shows
                                                                                       complete combustion, with no soot but producing a higher
                                                                                       quantity of heat.
                                                                                     • When products of combustion are sent through anhydrous
                                                                                       Cpper sulphate there is a blue colouration which confirms
                                                                                       that there is production of water vapour during combustion.
                                                                                     • when the products are sent through lime water, the milki
                                                                                       ness shown confirms the production of Carbon dioxide
                                                                                       during combustion.
                                                                                                                                   (45 mts.)
Criteria for assesment and evaluation

                         • Name the zones in the candle flame and explain their nature.
                         • Appreciates that combustion could be controlled depending on
                           its requirment.
                         • Observe the nature of a flame by simple experiment.
                         • Explane observations scientifically.
                         • Shows interest in the protection of one’s self, the others and
                           the environment.

Instructions for group exploration

                         • Your group is entrusted to find the nature of one of the flames.
                           • Flame of oil lamp.
                           • Flame of spirit lamp.
                           • Flame of Kerosene lamp.
                         • See whether the zones visible in the candle flame and in the
                           bunsen flame are visible in the flame provided to you.
                         • Engage in the following activities using the flame provided to
                           you.

                            • Holding a piece of ceremic brick to the flame horrizontally
                              above the flame for about 10 seconds.
                            • Holding a wire mesh horrizontally across the flame.
                            • Holding a glass slide horrizontally for about 2 sec. across
                              the flame.
                            • Introduce to the thin colourless outr zone of the flame the
                              end of a thin wire.
                            • Extinguish the flame and immediately hold the flame of an
                              ignited splinter close to the wick.
                            • Find the time required for 20 cm3 of water in a boiling tube
                              to boil.
                            • Compare the nature of the flame provided to you with the
                              flames of firewood hearth, Kerosene oil cooker and a gas
                              oven.
                            • In the instances given above the fundermentel components
                              elements present in the fuel are Carbon and Hydrogen. The
                              following set up is provided to you to undestand about the
                              products of combustion in the flame.
• Discuss in the group the equipment to be used, procedure
                                                                                                                        to be adopted and observation expected.
                                                                                                                      • Be prepared to present your findings to the class.

                                                                                                                                                                        Annex 3.7.2

                                                                                                                  Instrution setting up work station

                                                                                     • Keep the following materials and set up three work stations.
                                                                                                         •     Piece of ceremic brick
                                                                                                         •     Copper wire guage
                                                                                                         •     Glass slide
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                         •     Piece of wire 20 cm long.
                                                                                                         •     Box of matches
                                                                                                         •     Candle stick
                                                                                     • In the above work stations, in the first keep coconut oil lamp in the second spirit lamp, in th
                                                                                       third Kerosene oil lamp.
                                                                                     • Display a burning bunsen burner for all the students in the class to observe.
Competency 3.0            : Use chemical changes suitably to fullfill necessities of life


                                                                                     Competency Level 3.8       :Shows awareness in extinguished fires
                                                                                     Activity 3.8               :
                                                                                                                Prevent fire accidents'
                                                                                     Time                       :120 mts'
                                                                                     Quality inputs             :• Incident on ,"Hoe fire became a foe to me" in
                                                                                                                   annex 3.8.1
                                                                                                                 • Three cop[ies of instructions for group exploration given
                                                                                                                   in annex 3.8.2
                                                                                                                 • Instruction for arrangement of work stations given in
                                                                                                                   annex 3.8.3
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                 • Artical in annex 3.8.4 on " Let us not fall prey to fire"
                                                                                                                 • Demy and pastals
                                                                                     Teaching- learning process :
                                                                                     Step 3.8.1                  : • Get a student to precent the incident to class.
                                                                                                                    • Lead a discussion highlighting the following points.
                                                                                                                      • The possibility of causing fires due to unprotected
                                                                                                                         bottle lamps.
                                                                                                                      • It is possible for accidental fires to cause deaths or
                                                                                                                         bodily problems for life times.
                                                                                                                      • When a person who had caught fire to his cloths
                                                                                                                         run, the supply of Oxygen is better and as a result
                                                                                                                         could develop further.
                                                                                                                      • When clothes catch fire , it is possible to controll the
                                                                                                                         fire by wrapping the body with a gunny bag or a
                                                                                                                         thick clothe.
                                                                                                                      • Fire gets extinguished when one or more factors
                                                                                                                         shown by the fire trangle are removed.
                                                                                                                                                      at


                                                                                                                                                                  O
                                                                                                                                                    He




                                                                                                                                                                  xy
                                                                                                                                                                      -




                                                                                                                                                           Fuel


                                                                                                                                                                      (15 mts)

                                                                                                                                 94
Step 3.8.2   • Divide the class into three groups.
                                                                                                  • Provide the groups with exploration instructions , the artical, demy
                                                                                                   paper and pastel.
                                                                                                  • Assign the tasks and engage the groups on exploration.
                                                                                                  • Prepair them to present their findings to the class.

                                                                                                                                                              (60 mts)
                                                                                     Step 3.8.3   • Get the groups to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                  • Give the first opportunity to the respective group to eleborate on
                                                                                                    the presentation.
                                                                                                  • Get other groups to prepare constructive suggestion.
                                                                                                  • Summarize highlighting the following points.
                                                                                                      • Fiires are grouped as follows in order to make it easy to
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                       select the the correct fire extinguisher for the respective fire.
                                                                                                           • A grade fires - Fires associated with Carbonic compounds
                                                                                                                             like wood, clothes, paper etc.
                                                                                                           • B grade fires - Liquids with highly inflammable like petrolium
                                                                                                                              products, paints, wax, copra, plastic,
                                                                                                                              polithene and grease etc.
                                                                                                           • C grade fires - All gasses which are inflammable, like
                                                                                                                              acetylene, L.P. gas, propane, butane etc.
                                                                                                           • D grade fires - Fires from metals like Sodium, Potassium
                                                                                                                              Magnesium etc.
                                                                                                      • It is possioble to use water fire extinguisher for A grade fires.
                                                                                                      • Soda - Acid fore extinguisher for A grade fires.
                                                                                                      • Foam fire extinguisher could be used for B grade fires.
                                                                                                      • Carbon dioxide fire extinguisher especially suitable for B and C
                                                                                                        rate fires, and when required for A grade fires.
                                                                                                      • Halon fire extinguisher could be used for all grades of fires.
                                                                                                      • Especially for D grade fires and sometimes for C grade fires
                                                                                                        ( Dry powder ) fire extinguisher could be used.
                                                                                                      • Water or foam fire extinguisher are not suitable for fires which
                                                                                                         has a electricity leakage or where there is a possibility of an
                                                                                                         electricity leakage.
                                                                                                      • The supply of electricity must be disconnected before any
                                                                                                        attemp is made to extinguish a fire where there is an electricity
                                                                                                        leakage or where there is a possibility of an electricity leakage.
                                                                                                      • In the experimental fire extinguisher water with Carbon dioxide
                                                                                                        under pressure comes out of the fire extinguisher where Sodium
                                                                                                        bicarbonate and dilute Sulphuric acid reaction is used.
                                                                                                      • In the experimental fire extinguisher where Sodium bicarbonte
                                                                                                       and Aluminium sulphate reaction is used, the foam comes out
                                                                                                       under pressure.
                                                                                                      • In the experimental water fire extinguisher a jet of water under
                                                                                                       pressure comes out.
                                                                                                                                                   (45 mts)
                                                                                                                       95
Critaria for assesments and evalution.

• Explane types of fires, instructions for extinguishing fires, instance where there suuitable for
  use.
• Appreciates the fact that the fire extingusher must be chosen depending on the type of fire.
• Construct a simple working model of a fire extinguisher.
• Shows a tendency to protect from accidents.
• Learn from experiances of others.

                                                                                     Annex 3.8.1

                                How fire became a foe to me

    I am Acvhala. From my small days I had the habit of getting up early in the morning and
helping mother. As we did not have electricity in our house we used bottle lamps. On this unfor-
tunate day too I got up in the morning lighted the oil lamp. When I was going to the kitchen to
ignite the hearth the bottle lamp fell erom my hand. The kerosene oil get smeared and the flame
extended. Mt clothes caught fire. When I was shoutiung and running about the flae increased
further. Fortunately I fell down. Mother came running and wrapped me with a gunny bag. Al-
though the flames extinguished I was unconseious. I regained consciousses at the hospital. My
hands, legs and face were burn. When I recovered I was left with a folded skin and some big
scars. Whenever I see them it gave me a great pain. I related this story to you, young sisters and
brothers, to redused my pain and also to tell you about how important it is to protect yourself
from fires.

                                                                                     Annex 3.8.2

                           Instruction for group exploration

• Draw your attention to the incident assigned to you from the following.
    • To extinguish of small fire in the stationery stores of the office using the Soda Acid fire
     extinguisher.
    • Extinguishing a spreading fire in a fuel filling stations using a foam fire extinguisher.
    • To controle a fire in carpentry shop using water fire extinguisher.
• Disscus the principal of the allocated fire extinguisher and also how the fire is extinguished.
• Arrange the set up of the fire extinguisher allocated to you by using the instruments and the
  materials provided in work stations.
• Be prepared to present to thre class about the activity of the fire extinguisher you set up and
  your findings you discover.




                                                96
Annex 3.8.3
                                                                                                             Instruction for setting work stations

                                                                                     Work station - I

                                                                                     Bottle with a large mouth and a stopper to fit with a single hole
                                                                                     Small bottle without a lid
                                                                                     A delivery tube bend in shape L, with a jet at the end of it to fit the hole in the stopper
                                                                                     Dilute sulphuric acid
                                                                                     Consentrade solution of Sodiuim bicarbonate
                                                                                     Clay pot to burn a fire
                                                                                     Box of matches
                                                                                     Pieces of paper fit to burn
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     Piece of jute thread
                                                                                     The diagram

                                                                                                                                     Dilute Sulphuric Acid




                                                                                                                               Sodium bicarbonete solution




                                                                                     Work station - II
                                                                                     Bottle with a large mouth and a stopper to fit with a single hole
                                                                                     Small bottle without a lid
                                                                                     A delivery tube bend in shape L, with a jet at the end of it to fit the hole in the stopper
                                                                                     Solution of Aluminium sulphate
                                                                                     Solution of Sodium bicarbonate
                                                                                     Clay pot to burn a fire
                                                                                     Box of matches
                                                                                     Small quantity of kerosene oil to burn
                                                                                     Piece of thread
                                                                                     The diagram




                                                                                                                                     Aluminium sulpahte
                                                                                                                                     solution


                                                                                                                               Sodium bicarbonete solution


                                                                                                                                     97
Worl station - III

                                                                                     One inch PVC pipe about 25 cm
                                                                                     A lid or endcap to close the end
                                                                                     3/4 inch wooden handle slightly longer than 25 cm
                                                                                     Bottom of an old slipper
                                                                                     Sharp knife
                                                                                     Some PVC gum
                                                                                     One inch Iron nail
                                                                                     Small hammer
                                                                                     A clay pot to burn a fire
                                                                                     Box of matches
                                                                                     Wood which ignite easily
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     The diagram




                                                                                                                                                                           Annex 3.8.4
                                                                                                             " Let us not fall prey to fire"

                                                                                            Fire is very essential to man but also it is distructive. Three conditions are necessary for
                                                                                     fire to burn. There are , a combustible subtance, heat energy required for it to burn and Oxygen.
                                                                                     When a fire is destructive it must immediatly extinguished. For this one or more factors given
                                                                                     about must be removed. Fire extinguishers are manufactured for this. All fires cannot be extin-
                                                                                     guished from a single fire extinguisher. Because of this in order to select the best fire extinguisher
                                                                                     the fires are grouped.

                                                                                     A - grade fires
                                                                                     This includes fires caused by materials with contains carbonic compounds like wood, cloths,
                                                                                     paper etc.

                                                                                     B -grade fires
                                                                                     This includes fires caused by materials which are highly imflammable liquids, or liquids
                                                                                     petrolium products, paints, wax, copra, plastic, polythene, grease etc.

                                                                                     C - grade fires
                                                                                     This includes fires caused by all inflammeble gasses like Acetylene, LP gas, Propane, Butane
                                                                                     etc.

                                                                                     D - grade fires
                                                                                     This includes fires caused by metals like Sodium, Potassium, Magnesium etc.


                                                                                                                                      98
Water fire extinguisher is used in the case of A - grade fires. A large quatity of water is blown
                                                                                     to and it behaves as an artificial rain and falls on the whole burning systems. As a result of the
                                                                                     water absorbing heat from the combustible subtaince the fire is extinguished. For small scale fires
                                                                                     manually controlled water fire extinguishers are used. In these water is kept at very high pressure
                                                                                     using Carbon dioxide or Nitrogen.

                                                                                     Soda - Acid fire extinguisher can be used to extinguish A - grade fires. It is arrange in a way
                                                                                     that the Sodium bicarbonate and dilute Sulphuric acid are kept in seperate cylinders. When these
                                                                                     two subtances get mixed water and Corbon dioxide are forced out at high pressure. As a result
                                                                                     of Carbon dioxide the fire is prevented from gettin the gas which supports combustion.

                                                                                     Foam fire extinguisher is especialy designed to extinguished B - grade fires. In the foam fire
                                                                                     extinguisher thre is artificially prepared foam. When foam at high pressure falls on oil it floates
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     and prevent the combustible suntance coming in contact with the supporter of combution Oxy-
                                                                                     gen.

                                                                                     Carbon dioxide fire extinguisher is manufactured by storing liquid Carbon dioxide at high
                                                                                     pressure. In case of a fire the liquid Carbon dioxide is directed on to the fire. By useing this fire
                                                                                     extinguisher A,B and C grde fires could be extinguished. When using this fire extinguisher it must
                                                                                     be used in such way to prevent accidents to the person who is using the equipment and the
                                                                                     people who are in the fire from inhale Carbon dioxide gas.


                                                                                     Halon fire extinguisher is good to extinguished all fires. It has Nitrogen gas mixed with Halon
                                                                                     and liquified. This gas cool the combustible substaince , and the suppoter of combution is pre-
                                                                                     vented from reaching it. A special significance of this fire extinguisher ther is no left over of
                                                                                     anything given out from the extinguisher.

                                                                                     Dry fire extinguisher the chemicals subtance used in this are Potassium bicarbonate, Sodium
                                                                                     bicarbonate, Ammonium phosphate and Ternary Eautetic Chloride powder. In this case when
                                                                                     the dry powder is directed to the fire the chemical reaction in the flame stops, prevent the com-
                                                                                     bustible subtance from reaching the ignation temperature. The superter of combution is pre-
                                                                                     vented from coming into contact with the combustible subtance, the flame is extinguished.
                                                                                     The fire extinguisher is specially suitable for D grade fires and sometimes for C grade fires.




                                                                                                                                     99
Competency       3.0    : Use of chemical changes suitable to fulfil necessities of life


                                                                                     Competency level 3.9 : Produce a gas - Examine its properties.

                                                                                     Time                    : 120 mts.

                                                                                     Quality inputs          : • A baloon filled with H2 gas, according to instructions given in
                                                                                                                 annex 3.9.1. and an empty baloon.
                                                                                                               • Three copies of article on instructions for exploration given in
                                                                                                                 annex 3.9.2
                                                                                                               • Work stations arranged accordind to instructions given in
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                 annex 3.9.3
                                                                                                               • Demy papers and pastel

                                                                                     Teaching learning
                                                                                            process          :

                                                                                     Step             3.9.1 : • Take the baloon filled with H2 gas, to the class. (do not
                                                                                                                mention that it contains H2 gas)
                                                                                                              • Give the other baloon to a student and instruct him to blow into
                                                                                                                it so that it is of the same size as the H2 filled baloon and tie it.
                                                                                                              • Let the students predict as to what would happen when the
                                                                                                                two baloons are released from hand, direct them to observe.
                                                                                                              • Lead a discussion highlighting the following points.
                                                                                                                • Both baloons contain the same volume of gas.
                                                                                                                • One baloon contain H2 gas.
                                                                                                                • The other baloon has expired air.
                                                                                                                • H2 gas is less dense than normal air, as a result the baloon
                                                                                                                    went up.
                                                                                                                • Expired air is more dense than normal air, as a result the
                                                                                                                    baloon went down.
                                                                                                                • Different gases have different physical and chemical
                                                                                                                    properties.
                                                                                                                                                                  (15 mts)

                                                                                     Step             3.9.2 : • Devide the class into three groups.
                                                                                                              • Provide the groups with instrutions for exploration, demy and
                                                                                                                pastal.
                                                                                                              • Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration.
                                                                                                              • Prepare them to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                                                                              (60 mts.)
Step   3.9.3   : • Get the groups to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                      • Give the first oppotunity to the respective groups to elaborate
                                                                                                        on their presentation
                                                                                                      • Get the other groups to propose contructive suggestions.
                                                                                                      • Summerize highlighting the following points
                                                                                                        • H2 gas has the following properties.
                                                                                                           • Colourless
                                                                                                           • No smell
                                                                                                           • Lighter than air
                                                                                                           • Slightly soluble in water
                                                                                                           • Doesnot change the colour of moist litmus paper
                                                                                                           • Burn with a ‘pop’ sound when a burning splinter is
                                                                                                              introduced
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                           • No colour change with lime water
                                                                                                        • It is possible to indicate the chemical reaction between Zn
                                                                                                           and dilute HCl by the chemical equatiion given below.
                                                                                                              Zn(s) + 2HCl(aq)        ZnCl2 + H2(g)

                                                                                                             •O2 gas has the following properties.
                                                                                                             •Colourless
                                                                                                             •No smell
                                                                                                             •Heavier than air
                                                                                                             •Slightly soluble in water.
                                                                                                             •Doesnot change the colour of moist litmus paper.
                                                                                                             •when a glowing splinter is introduced it burns rapidly.
                                                                                                              (suporter of combustion)
                                                                                                            • No colour change with lime water.
                                                                                                          • The production of O2 gas by the dissociation of H2O2 by
                                                                                                            MnO2 is given by the chmical equation given below.
                                                                                                              H2O2(aq)            2H2O(l) + O2(g)

                                                                                                             • CO2 gas has the following propeties.
                                                                                                             • Colourless
                                                                                                             • No smell
                                                                                                             • Heavier than air
                                                                                                             • Slightly soluble in water
                                                                                                             • Moist blue litmus paper turns pink
                                                                                                             • Extinguish a glowing spliter
                                                                                                             • Turns lime water milky ( when more gas is bubbled
                                                                                                               through the solution become colourless)
                                                                                                             • The chemical reaction which produce CO2 by reacting
                                                                                                               CaCO3 with dilute HCl is given by the equation given
                                                                                                               below.
                                                                                                                 CaCO3(s) + 2HCl(aq)         CaCl2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(l)

                                                                                                                                                     (60 mts.)
Criteria for assesment and evaluation

                                                                                                                  •   State the properties of O2, H2 and CO2 gases.
                                                                                                                  •   Appreciates that gases have varying properties.
                                                                                                                  •   Tests the properties of gases.
                                                                                                                  •   Prepare a set up illustrated by a diagram
                                                                                                                  •   confirms identity by properties.

                                                                                                                                                                        Annex 3.9.1


                                                                                                             Getting a baloon filled with H2
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                                                            Baloon with H2




                                                                                                      Tub
                                                                                                                                                           Bottle

                                                                                             NaOH solution                               o                  Water
                                                                                                                                       o
                                                                                                                                       o
                                                                                                                                   o
                                                                                          Pieces of Aluminium


                                                                                                                                                                        Annex 3.9.2

                                                                                                          Instrutions for group exploration

                                                                                     • Your group is assigned to produce one of the gases given below and find its’ physical and
                                                                                       chemical properties.
                                                                                                         •     Oxygen gas
                                                                                                         •     Hydrogen gas
                                                                                                         •     Carbon dioxide gas
                                                                                     • Using the materials placed in the respective workstations, instruments and the diagram
                                                                                       prepare a set up to produce the gas assigned to you.
                                                                                     • Conduct the following tests to understand the properties of the gas.
                                                                                                         •     Introduce into the gas a glowing splinter with the flame extinguished
                                                                                                             and a glowing splinter with the flame.
                                                                                                         •     Hold to the gas moistened blue and red litmus papers.
                                                                                                         •     Bubbling the gas throuh lime water.
                                                                                     • State your observation in each of the instances.
                                                                                     • Arrive at conclusions about the properties of the gas from your observations.
                                                                                     •Be prepared to present your findings to the class.
Annex 3.9.3


                                                                                                                  Instructions to set up work stations

                                                                                     • Prepare three workstations and provide with materials necessary to set up an experiment as
                                                                                       given in the illustration below.

                                                                                                                                    Delivery tube

                                                                                               Thistle funnel

                                                                                                                                                           Gas jar
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                             Conical flask
                                                                                                                                                                     Trough
                                                                                                                                                               Beehive shelf


                                                                                                                                     Water



                                                                                     • Provide each workstation with a illustration of the experiment, two test tubes, lime water,
                                                                                       Red and Blue litmus papers, splinters and box of matches.



                                                                                     Work station - 01


                                                                                                                  • MnO2
                                                                                                                  • H2O 2         Mno2
                                                                                                                  • 2H2O2 (aq)               2H2O(l) + O2(g) (In a display board)




                                                                                     Work station - 02

                                                                                                                  • Zn turnings
                                                                                                                  • Dilute HCl acid
                                                                                                                  • Zn(s) + 2HCl(aq)          ZnCl2(aq) + H2(g) (in a display board)
Work station - 03

                                                                                                         • CaCO3
                                                                                                         • Dilute HCl acid
                                                                                                         • CaCO3(s) + 2HCl(aq)    CaCl2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(l)
                                                                                                           (In a display board)
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.
Competency        3.0   : Use chemicals reaction appropriately to fulfil requirments
                                                                                                               in life.

                                                                                     Competency level 3.10: Investigates experimentally changes in heat associated with
                                                                                                            chemical reactions.

                                                                                     Activity          3.10 : Let study the changes in heat associated with chemical changes.

                                                                                     Time                    : 120 mts.

                                                                                     Quality input           : • Two test tubes, two glass rods, 2g each of Glucose and
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                 Sodium hydroxide
                                                                                                               • Four work stations arranged according to the instrutions given
                                                                                                                 in annex 3.10.1
                                                                                                               • four copies of instrutions for exploration given in annex 3.10.2
                                                                                                               • Demy papers and pastel

                                                                                     Teaching - learning
                                                                                            process          :

                                                                                     Step            3.10.1 : • Get two students in front of the class and give a test tube with
                                                                                                                water and a glass rod to each.
                                                                                                              • Provide one student with some Sodium hydroxide and the
                                                                                                                other some Glucose and allow them to dissolve them in the
                                                                                                                water and instruct them to report to the class any observations
                                                                                                                about change in temperature.
                                                                                                              • Conduct a discussion highlighting the following.
                                                                                                                • Temperature of the solution increased when Sodium hy
                                                                                                                   droxide was dissolved in water.
                                                                                                                • Temperarure of the solution decreased when Glucose was
                                                                                                                   dissolved in water.
                                                                                                                • Change of heat ia associated with chemical changes.
                                                                                                                • It is possible to calculate the change in heat by using change
                                                                                                                   in temperature of the solution.
                                                                                                                • If the change in temperature is q , mass of the solution in m
                                                                                                                   the specific heat capacity c , the heat change is Q is
                                                                                                                   expressed by the equation,
                                                                                                                   Q = mcq
                                                                                                                • The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 kJ0C-1kg-1
                                                                                                                • Mass of 1 cm3 of water is 1 g,
                                                                                                                                                               (15 mts.)
Step    3.10.2   : • Devide the class into four groups
                                                                                                        • Provide the groups with instrutions for exploration, demy
                                                                                                          paper and pastel
                                                                                                        • Assign the tasks and engage groups in exploration.
                                                                                                        • Prepare the groups for whole class presentation.
                                                                                                                                                       (60 mts.)

                                                                                     Step   3.10.3    : • Get the groups to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                        • Give the first oppotunity for elaboration to the respective group
                                                                                                           which made the presentation.
                                                                                                        • Get the other groups propose construtive suggestions.
                                                                                                        • Summerize highlighting the following points.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                           • If heat is given out during a chemical reaction the tempera-
                                                                                                             ture of the reacting mixture increase.
                                                                                                           • Reaction which liberate heat during reactions are exother-
                                                                                                             mic reactions.
                                                                                                           • If heat is absorbed during a chemical reaction the tempera
                                                                                                             ture of the reacting mixture decrease.
                                                                                                           • Reactions which absorb heat during areaction are endother-
                                                                                                             mic reactions.
                                                                                                           • In an exothermic reaction, the energy in the product is less
                                                                                                             than that of the reactants.
                                                                                                           • In an endothermic reaction the energy in the products is
                                                                                                             more than more than that of the reactants.
                                                                                                           • It is important to use quatities of reactanta which show
                                                                                                             practically measurable temperature difference.
                                                                                                           • In this experiment we hypothesize that,
                                                                                                             • The entire quantity of heat associated with the reaction
                                                                                                                  was used to change the temperature of the reacting
                                                                                                                  mixure.
                                                                                                             • Heat capacity of solutions is equal to the heat capacity
                                                                                                                  of water.
                                                                                                             • The density of the solution is equal to the density of
                                                                                                                  water.
                                                                                                           • Change of heat calculated in a reaction, change with the
                                                                                                             physical nature of the product and reactants.
                                                                                                           • Therefore when change of heat associated with a reaction is
                                                                                                             stated it is necessary to indicate the physical state of reac-
                                                                                                             tants and products.
                                                                                                           • To observe a maximum change in temperature the loss of
                                                                                                             heat to the enviroment must be minimized.
• Loss of heat could be minimized by conducting the experi
                                                                                                                       ment in an insulated vessel.
                                                                                                                     • To allow the reactants to mix well, the mixture should be
                                                                                                                       stirred with a stirrer/glass rod.

                                                                                                                                                                    (45 mts.)
                                                                                     Criteria for assesment and evaluation

                                                                                     • Explane with examples, exothermic and endothermic reactions.
                                                                                     • Appreciates that there ia an exchange of heat associated with chemical reactions.
                                                                                     • Determine experimentally the heat change associated with chemical reactions.
                                                                                     • Reach conclusions based on hypothesis.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     • Investigates the accuracy of conclusions.

                                                                                                                                                                      Annex 3.10.1
                                                                                                                    Instructions to prepare work stations

                                                                                     • Have the following set of materials in all the work stations and also specially mentioned items
                                                                                       in the respective work stations
                                                                                                         •     Thermometer
                                                                                                         •     Measuring cylinder
                                                                                                         •     100 cm3 beaker
                                                                                                         •     Stirrer or glass rod.

                                                                                     Work station - 01

                                                                                     • 50 cm3 of HCl solution (add 8 cm3 of concentrated HCl up to 50 cm3 of water)
                                                                                     • NaOH pellets 1g

                                                                                     Work station - 02
                                                                                     • 50 cm3 of CuSO4 solution (dissolve 5 g of CuSO4 salt in 50 cm3 of water)
                                                                                     • Fe powder 1 g

                                                                                     Work station - 03
                                                                                     • 50 cm3 of H2SO4 ( add 3 cm3 of conc. H2SO4 to 47 cm3 of water)
                                                                                     • Clean Mg pieces 0.5 g

                                                                                     Work station - 04
                                                                                     • NaHCO3 2g
                                                                                     • Citric acid about 50 cm3 (dissolve 5g of Citric acid in 50 cm3 of water)
Annex 3.10.2
                                                                                                                  Instructions for group exploration

                                                                                     • Draw your attention to the following chemical reactions assigned to your group
                                                                                                        •      NaOH(s) + HCl(aq)         NaCl(aq) + H2O(l)
                                                                                                        •      CuSO4(aq) + Zn(s)            ZnSO4(aq) + Cu(s)
                                                                                                        •      H2SO4(aq) + Mg(s)          MgSO4(aq) + H2(g)
                                                                                                        •      NaHCO3(s) + Citric acid (aq)        Sodium citrate (aq)+ CO2   (g)
                                                                                                                                                                                    +
                                                                                                               H2O(l)

                                                                                     • Go to your work station and device an experiment to conduct the allocated reaction to
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                       determine the heat change.
                                                                                     • When handling chemical subtances be careful about the dameges to you and the others.
                                                                                     • Calculate the change of heat associated with a molecular mass of the solid state reactant
                                                                                        used.
                                                                                                        H=1            Na = 23           Cl = 35.5
                                                                                                        C = 12         Mg = 24            Zn = 65
                                                                                                        O = 16         S = 32             Cu = 63.5




                                                                                     • Discuss about the following points.
                                                                                                        •      Errors in the experiment.
                                                                                                        •      How to minimize errors.
                                                                                                        •      Hypothesis used in calculations.

                                                                                     • Be prepared for a presentation of your findings to the class.
Competency              3.0 :Use chemical changes in an appropriate way to
                                                                                                                   fulfil living requirments.


                                                                                     Competency level     3.11 :Investigates how weathering of rocks help in the
                                                                                                                 formation of soil
                                                                                     Activity             3.11 :Let us Investigates how weathering of rocks help in the
                                                                                                                   formation of soil
                                                                                     Time                      : 120 minutes
                                                                                     Quality inputs            : • Small pieces of granite,quartz,limestone,mica
                                                                                                                   • Three copies of instructions for exploration given in
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                          annex 3.11.1
                                                                                                                    • Three copies of the article"Earth and rocks"
                                                                                                                    • Demy papers and pastels
                                                                                     Teaching-learning process :
                                                                                     Step       3.11.1         : • Small pieces of granite/quartz,limestone and mica are
                                                                                                                     distributed among the students and directed to observe
                                                                                                                      them.
                                                                                                                   ² Inquire from the students how the substances provided
                                                                                                                      as well as similar substances are subjected to change
                                                                                                                      Conduct a discussion to highlight the following points.
                                                                                                                      That,
                                                                                                                         ² According to observations ,in the piece of granite there
                                                                                                                            are black coloured and shining components are
                                                                                                                            included in different quantities.
                                                                                                                        ² The piece of granite is a heterogeneous mixture.
                                                                                                                        ² According to observations quartz,limestone and mica
                                                                                                                           pieces shows homogeneous nature.
                                                                                                                        ² A mineral is a crystalline non carbonic substance which
                                                                                                                           is homogeneous and having a definite geometric shape
                                                                                                                           and a definite compossition.
                                                                                                                        ² A heterogeneous solid mixture without a definite
                                                                                                                          compossition and a geometric shape and made up of a
                                                                                                                          number of minerals is called a rock.
                                                                                                                       ² Due to physical,chemical and biological activities
                                                                                                                           minerals and rockes change into different types.
                                                                                                                                                                    (15 minutes)
Step   3.11.2       ( ² Divide the class into three groups.
                                                                                                           ² Provide the groups with instruction for exploration the
                                                                                                             article,demy papers and pastel.
                                                                                                           ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration.
                                                                                                           ² Prepare them to present their findings to the whole class.
                                                                                                                                                           (60 minutes)

                                                                                     Step   3.11.3   (      ² Get each group to present their findings to the class.
                                                                                                            ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to
                                                                                                              elaborate on the presentation.
                                                                                                            ² Get the other groups to propose constructive sugges
                                                                                                                 tions,
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                            ² Elaborate highlighting the following points.
                                                                                                              That,
                                                                                                              ² It is possible to distinguish three types of
                                                                                                                rocks, igneous,Sedimentary and metamorphic
                                                                                                                 rockes.
                                                                                                              ² Igneous rocks are formed from cooling magma
                                                                                                                 coming from the interior of theEarth.
                                                                                                                 Eg. Basalt.
                                                                                                              ² Magma coming to the surface of the earth from
                                                                                                                 empting volcanoes is subjected to rapid cooling
                                                                                                                 ,forms igneous rocks,which are made up of small
                                                                                                                 crystals.
                                                                                                                 Eg. Granite
                                                                                                              ² Magma which cools slowly inside the earth forms
                                                                                                                 igneous rocks with big crystals.
                                                                                                              ² Igneous rocks are very hard and there is indication to
                                                                                                                 show that they are deposited as layer or grains.
                                                                                                              ² Weathering of hard rocks result in mineral and
                                                                                                                 carbonic substances which are deposited as layers at
                                                                                                                 the bottom of reservoirs.
                                                                                                              ² When sedemented layers at the bottom are subjected
                                                                                                                 to pressure from layers above,Sedimentary rocks are
                                                                                                                 formed.
                                                                                                                 Eg. Mudstone,Conglomerate
                                                                                                              ² The Sedimentary rocks are not as hard as igneous
                                                                                                                 rocks.
                                                                                                                 Eg.Limestone
• When igneous and sedimentary rocks are subjected to
                                      temperature,pressure and movement of the surface of
                                      the earth,their nature changes and form metamorphic
                                      rocks.
                                      Eg Marble,slate
                                   • Nature of Metamorphic rocks differs according to the
                                      original rock from which it was formed.
                                   • Breaking down of rocks expossed on the surface of the
                                      earth into small parts due to physical,chemical and
                                      biological factors is called Weatherning of rocks.
                                   • Rocks are subjected to physical Weatherning due to
                                      Sun,rain,wind and ice.
                                   • Chemical Weatherning of rocks is when a rock is
                                      subjected to a chemical change where compounds in
                                      it are changed to simple compounds.
                                   • Due to some activities of living beings on rocks,both
                                      physical and chemical weatherning takes place.
                                   • Soil is formed when sand and clay formed from
                                      Weatherning of rocks combine with Organic matter
                                      from plants and animals.
                                   • Formation of rocks,and they under go weatherning and
                                      form soil ,occur as a cycle in nature.
                                   • Rocks in earth undergo changes from one from to
                                      another in a cyclic movement.
                                                                        (45 mts)


Criteria for assessment and Evaluation
² Explain how soil is formed from weatherning of rocks.
²Appreciates that rocks undergo changes in a cycle.
² Observe diversity in rocks..
²Collect data from sources.
² Present data in an attractive way.
Annexe 3.11.1
                                                                                                                  Instructions for group exploration
                                                                                     ²Your group is assigned to investigate how one type of rock is formed and how one factor
                                                                                      help in the weathering of rocks.
                                                                                                  • Types of rocks according                   • Factors help in
                                                                                                    to how it is formed                          weatherning of rocks
                                                                                                          • Igneous rocks                            • Chemical factors
                                                                                                          • Metamorphic rocks                       • Physical factors
                                                                                                          • Sedmentary rocks                          • Human and other biological
                                                                                                                                                        factors
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     ² Discuss in the group about the type of rock you are assigned to you and about the factor
                                                                                      that help in the weathering of rock.
                                                                                     ² Be prepared for a creative presentation of your findings.

                                                                                                                                                                    Annexe 3.11.2
                                                                                                                       Earth and Rocks
                                                                                      The day for which Anil,Upul and Namal were eagerly waiting for arrived. the three showed
                                                                                     a keen interest for Geology. It was for no other reason but the teacher was able to make the
                                                                                     classroom interesting by engaging them in various activities to arouse the interest of the
                                                                                     students.The trip was organised to educate them about geological resources.
                                                                                       Anil started the discussion by stating that"Man`s curiosity about minerals started from the
                                                                                     time he found that implements could be made by stones."But man used pieces of stones to
                                                                                     make stone implements.Rocks found nature are stones which are a combination of one or
                                                                                     mo
                                                                                      Teacher introduced his friend, geology Professor.He spoke to the three students and said,
                                                                                     "Our country is full of resources.out of these resources Geological resources occupy an
                                                                                     important place.Only a minute fraction of it could be found during this trip."
                                                                                     As the vehical was moving he showed a granite rock and said,early man may have made
                                                                                     implements from these.The granite rocks they used to make implements belong to the igneous
                                                                                     rocks.In Latin `Ignis`means fire.At a depth of more than 30km from the surface of the
                                                                                     earth,the rocks get liquietised or fused due to high temperature.This liquid is known
                                                                                     as`Magma`When this magma comes to the surface of the earth during volcanic eruptions,it is
                                                                                     called `lava`.When this lava gets cooled and solidified igneous rocks are formed.It is possible
                                                                                     for this lava to cool inside the earth and form igneous rocks.
In addition to granite,basalt,rhyolite and obsidian are examples for igneous rocks explained the
Professor.
At the moment the vehicle was going along a road .which was constructed recently after
cutting a hill. The Professor instructed the vehicle to be stopped. Professor said"Let us get
down from the vehicle,I will show you something". All of us walked behind the Professor.
"Can all of you see clearly the layers deposited in this cross section of the hill.Any rock which
is regularly exposed to factors and agents like high heating,high cooling,Sun,Rain,Acid rain
breaking up due to water and wind break up into small particles.This process is called
weatherning of rocks".These settle as logitudinal layers on the surface of the earth,or at the
bottom of resoviors or ocean.These layers are called sediments.If these layers are arranged
loosely they occur as gravel,sand on the sea shore and sand dunes,when futher sedimentation
on top of these,occur the weight of these layers cause the particles to get tied together and
form into rocks.These are called `sedimentary rocks`.Mudstone,Conglomerate and Siltstones
are examples for sedimentary rocks.sometime animal bones and dead bodies of micro organ
sms with calcareous(calcium carbonate) shells gets deposited for millions of years forms a
sedimentary rock.,the limestone.These deposits are seen in the Jaffna peninsula and north of
Puttalm,said the teacher,joining the discussion."Does laterite stones (Kabok) belong to the
  i
sedimentary rocks"asked Upul. No.we do not consider it as a sedimentary rock because it
has been found that laterite is a product of some type of largely weathered rock which include
clay.
     When this discussion was going on with the Professor important was taken down in the
field note book.
       The group got into the vehocle and restarted the field trip." In Marshy places and in
forests with trees, the dead animals and plant materials get collected on the soil. They under go
changes and after millions of years forms coal." questioned Anil
    "Son, you raised a very good question."
When dead plant and animal matter which is carbonic matter is added to the soil it is decom-
posed by microorganisms. sometimes,soft and brown coloured peat is formed from these
carbonic material after a long period. In our country peat is found in Muthurajawela.When
peat inside the earth is subjected to pressure by the layers collecting on top of it,and high
temperature,coal is formed after is long period of time.Since coal is a carbonic material it is not
grouped under as either a mineral or rock.But some scientists include coal as carbonic rocks
under sedimentary rocks.This Process occur in lakes,resoriviors or marshy or Brakish water
having environments explained the professor.
Then upul asked that in addition to igneous rocks and Sedimentary rocks,their is metamorphic
rocks.

The high temperature and pressure inside the core of the earth or movement of the earths`
crust or chemical action with other substances and gases rocks undergo changes.
As a result of this rocks become metamorphic rocks,explained the teacher.
                                                                                     During these change,the mineral composition or the texture(what you see on the surface and
                                                                                     what you feel when you touch it with your hand) of the rock or both could change.For ex-
                                                                                     ample when limestone gets metamorphed it changes to marble said the Professor.
                                                                                     Further examples of this are greiss,slate, and quartzite.As namal said at the begining,any type
                                                                                     of rock turns to liquid magma at the core of the earth.where the temperature is about 6600C.
                                                                                     That is correct,as magma inside the earth comes to the surface,it is called lava.Igneous rocks
                                                                                     are formed from magma or lava.
                                                                                     When we look at rocks this way I feel that there is cyclic movement among rock types.
                                                                                     "I wanted to explain this fact.Any type of rock on the surface of the earth undergo weathring
                                                                                     gets deposited as layers and form sedimentary rocks.Similarly rocks into metamorphic rocks
                                                                                     due high temperature,pressure and various chemical changes.The rocks in the core of the earth
                                                                                     gets liquified or fused and form magma and in the end form igneous rocks.In this way igneous
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     rocks,Sedimentary rocks,and metamorphic rocks changes from one to the other in a cycle.
                                                                                     This is called the rock cycle said the Professor.
                                                                                     Heard in another place.
                                                                                        This is the containing rocks.In each of these cubicles there is a different type of rock,give
                                                                                     the piece of rock named granite.This is not granite,it is different.This was brought from
                                                                                     Scotland.It is dark in colour.Its` crystals are very fine.When lava gets cooled suddenly this
                                                                                     high quality granite is formed. How about granite in our Country?
                                                                                     According to the data discovered by Scientists there is no pure granite in Sri Lanka.
                                                                                     But their are ancient stone pillars which are thousands of years old,we see them as if they were
                                                                                     built today.
                                                                                     Let me see the facts you wrote?The Professor started to read what they had written.
                                                                                     Ah.Here is the section written about weathering of rocks.
                                                                                     `yes`
                                                                                     Very good.Children this is the challange I give you.By refering to different resource material
                                                                                     construct an article on"the different ways of weathering of rocks".I give you two weeks from
                                                                                     today.There is a Valuable present for the best article and it would be published in the
                                                                                     Magazine.
Identify the charactors of following rocks




                                                                                        Sedimental
                                                                                        rocks
                                                                                        Eg. Sandtone
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     Metamorphic
                                                                                     rocks
                                                                                     Eg. Schist




                                                                                     Igneous
                                                                                     rocks
                                                                                     Eg. Granite
T




                                                                                         The three friends collected data from various electronic and printed media in addition to facts
                                                                                         collected during the trip.not only that,they collected data from books written by Srilankan
                                                                                         Scientists,and also from compact discs of diffferent encyclopedias and tried to present a
                                                                                         resourseful artical. The Artical submitted by Upul got the frist place.It was presented in the
                                                                                         following manner.


                                                                                                                 Rocks break up-Soil is formed

                                                                                         Rocks,which is earths` heritage regularly changes due to various factors and form soil. This
                                                                                         Process is known as weathering of rocks.

                                                                                         Physical weatherning of rocks
    Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                         Due to various factors the rocks on the surface of the earth break up into small parts which is
                                                                                         physical weathering.Heat of the Sun,water,wind are the factors which cause physical
                                                                                         weathering.
                                                                                         a) Exporsure of rock to sunlight
                                                                                         The top layers of the rocks exposed to sunlight gets dried up.This is due to Sun`s heat.During
                                                                                         rain it gets wet.The volume of the rock increase when it is hot and decrease when it is
                                                                                         cold.When this process is repeated there is weathering of the rock.



                                                                                                                         wõfjkqhs
                                                                                                                        jeiafikqhs ug
                                                                                                                        yß u lrorhs




                                                                                         Example.Shalka gal is a sedimentary rock. It is formed by layers arranging one on top of the
                                                                                         other.These get regularly dried up and wet,they undergo weathering,as a result the layers of
                                                                                         the rock break up and ultimately from small partices.

                                                                                         b) Rocks dissolve in water
                                                                                         When rocks come in contact with water,some minerals in it gets dissolved.As a result the
                                                                                         structure of the rock gets weak.Because of this the rock breaks up.
                                                                                         When carbon dioxide is dissolved in water it is acidic,this cause weathering to take place
                                                                                         faster.
c)Heating and cooling of rockes
                                                                                     Rocks are exposed to Sun during daytime.They undergo expansion due to Sun`s heat.At
                                                                                     night the rocks get coooled and as a result undergo contraction.Rocks made up of a number
                                                                                     of different minerals undergo weathering in this manner.Different minerals have different
                                                                                     coefficients of expansion.As a result the bonds between minerals in the rock become less.This
                                                                                     causes the surface of the rock to crack.This makes it easy for the rock to break up into small
                                                                                     parts.Water getting into the cracks is also a cause for weathering.
                                                                                     d)Sand brought by winds
                                                                                     When there is a heavy wind,the sand in the sea,and the rivers gets carried by it.When these
                                                                                     sand particles strike the rock small particles of it break off.
                                                                                     e)There is physical weathering due to rock particls striking one another in rivers and canals.
                                                                                     The pieces of rocks in rivers and canals become rounded due to parts of it getting removed.
                                                                                     f)Rain water could enter into the crackes in the rocks caused by various reasons.During the
                                                                                     winter season the water in the crackes turn to ice.The volume of ice is bigger than that of
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                     water.As a result the crack gets bigger.This causes the rock to split up.Big rocks spilt up into
                                                                                     pieces in this way.

                                                                                      Water gets
                                                                                      collected                      When        Ice                  With time
                                                                                      in the crackes                 water                            the rocks
                                                                                                                     turn to ice                      breaks up
                                                                                                                     there is




                                                                                                                    crack
                                                                                                                    gets
                                                                                                                    bigger
                                                                                                                             Temperature falls
                                                                                                                                  below 0 0 C




                                                                                                                           Due to hot and cold climate
                                                                                                                      big rocks break up into small pieces.
Chemical weathering of rocks
                                                                                     Rocks undergo chemical weathering due to the effect of various factors on rocks.The chemical
                                                                                     substance cause interaction with the rocks.As a result chemical changes occur in the rocks
                                                                                     forming simple compounds.Here oxygen,water,and acidic substances behave a agents of
                                                                                     weathering.These reacton takes place very slowly.



                                                                                        • The oxygen in the air,reacts with
                                                                                        minerals which go to form the rock,as
                                                                                        a result the rock undergo chemical
                                                                                        weathering.
                                                                                            For example as result of the iron
                                                                                        present in rocks,the rocks undergo
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                        weathering.
                                                                                                                                        Oxigen in the air cause Iron in the
                                                                                                                                                rock to corrode
                                                                                     • Formation of new compunds due to the reaction between the rocks and water is called
                                                                                       hydration.Hydration too cause weatherning of rocks.
                                                                                     • The minerals present in the rocks,sometime undergo hydrolysis.Minerals like Sodium ,
                                                                                       Potassium,Calcium,Magnesium,Aluminium and Iron undergo hydrolysis.
                                                                                       Example:- Hydrolysis of Orthoclas rock yeild Clay.
                                                                                     • When Carbondioxide is dissolved in rain water a weak acid is formed.(This is called
                                                                                       Cabonization.) This acidic water interacts with minerals in the rock.Here the carbonate of
                                                                                       the mineral is formed.This also cause weathering of rocks.




                                                                                            Eg:- Limestone is weathered
                                                                                            by carbonic acid eventually
                                                                                            cavems are formed




                                                                                     • In a soil where there there is decay of carbonic material by micro organisms the
                                                                                       carbondioxide gas is very high.This is because of the activity of microorganisms on the
                                                                                       decaying carbonic material.When this carbondioxide,dissolved in water interacts with
                                                                                       minerals in the rocks carbonates of the minerals is formed.This cause the weathering of
                                                                                        rocks.
                                                                                     • You must have seen white,light green,light blue patches growing on rocks.These patches are
                                                                                       symbiotic unions between algae and fungi.They are called Lichens.Secretions emitted by
                                                                                       these Lichens cause weathering of rocks.
                                                                                     • During Lightening, the nitrogen and oxygen react forming nitric oxide and nitrous oxide.These
                                                                                       gases dissolve in rain water nitric acid and nitrous acid are formed.Rain water with these
                                                                                       acids dissolved is called acid rain.These acids,when they fall on rocks cause weathering.
Weathering of rocks by living beings

                                                                                     • Living beings,living the same enviroment as the rocks,contribute to the weathering of rocks.
                                                                                       When roots of a plant close by grow into a split in a rock caused by physical weatherning
                                                                                       the split gets enlarged and the rock is split up.If not,If there is a crevice formed due to
                                                                                       chemical weathering which is suitable for plants to grow the roots of the plants increase the
                                                                                       split.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                               These tree rots have broken of pieces of
                                                                                               rocks
                                                                                     • Man cause weathering of rocks by breaking then up.
                                                                                     • When micro organisms grow on rocks the chemicals they emit cause weatherning of rocks.
                                                                                     • The lichens that grow on partially weathered rocks,physically or chemically,cause the
                                                                                       weathering of rock.
                                                                                     • Some animals which live associated with rocks dig up the soil around the rock.when rain
                                                                                       water gets collected in it cause weathering of the rock.
                                                                                       Eg:-Animals dig the soil around the rock.The water that is collected in these places cause
                                                                                           weathering of the rocks.
                                                                                     • When hooves and horns of animals are periodically rubbed or struck against the rocks,the
                                                                                       rocks get worn out.
                                                                                     • Reactions caused when excretons matter of animals gets collected on rocks,there is weath
                                                                                       ering of rocks.
Rock cycle




                                                                                            Igneous                  IGNEOUS rock is weathered
                                                                                            (extrusive)             and carried to the sea by revers

                                                                                         Igneous
                                                                                         (Intrusive)
                                                                                                                                                                         Sea

                                                                                                                             METAMORPHIC
                                                                                                            Magma                                                        SEDIMENTARY
                                                                                                                             rock
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                                                                         rock
                                                                                                                                                       Earth movements
                                                                                                              Rock is                                  squash and bury
                                                                                                              melted
                                                                                                                                                       the layers of
                                                                                                                                                       sedimentry rock

                                                                                     According to the states of cartoon nos. (1),(2) and (3) understand the above rock cycle
                                                                                     number (1),(2),(3).
Tools for Extended Teaching - Learning Process

                                                                                     1'0 Evaluation State                    ( Term 2, Tool 1
                                                                                     2'0 Competancy Levels covered             ( 1'1" 1'2" 1'3" 1'4
                                                                                     3'0 Subject content covered               ( ²          Atom
                                                                                                                               ² Sub Atomic particals
                                                                                                                               ² Model for Atomic structure
                                                                                                                               ² Atomic number
                                                                                                                               ² Mass number
                                                                                                                               ² Isotops
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                               ² Electron configuration
                                                                                                                               ² Relative Atomic Mass
                                                                                                                           ² Chemical bonds
                                                                                                                           ² Chemical formula for Molecules
                                                                                                                           ² Relative Molecular Mass
                                                                                                                           ² Avogardro constance
                                                                                                                           ² Mole (as a unit)
                                                                                                                           ² Atomic mole
                                                                                                                           ² Molecular mole
                                                                                                                           ² Molecular mass
                                                                                     4'0 Nature of Instruments           ( Presentation of literature survey
                                                                                     5'0 Objectives                      ( 1' Skill development as a finder of
                                                                                                                              new knowledge
                                                                                                                           2' To enhance the skills of reporting observations
                                                                                                                               as a scientist.
                                                                                                                           3 'To involve in analyzing the reported information
                                                                                                                              using various criteria.
                                                                                     6'0 Instructions for implementation (
                                                                                         For teacher                     ( ² This is valid for second term science syllabus
                                                                                                                              in competency level in 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4
                                                                                                                              Inform students to litriture survey start of the
                                                                                                                              second term.
                                                                                                                           ² In this tool each student is involve in an individual
                                                                                                                              process.
                                                                                                                           ² Direct the students subject content or part of
                                                                                                                              it to each student as your wish.

                                                                                                                                     117
² Inform the students in advance the date at which
                                                                                                                                    they have to submit the completed litreture
                                                                                                                                    survey.
                                                                                                                                  ² Provide constructive suggestions once or twice
                                                                                                                                    by examine their litreture survey before submition


                                                                                      For students                    (          ² Use litreture review for exploration for
                                                                                                                                   activities nos. 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4 relevent to
                                                                                                                                   second term in your science syllabus.
                                                                                                                                 ² Select to find information relevent to this topic
                                                                                                                                   • Magazine
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                                   • News papers
                                                                                                                                   • CD s
                                                                                                                                   • Internet
                                                                                                                                 ² Be prepair to present information you have
                                                                                                                                   collected by utilizing available resources.
                                                                                                                                 ² Mention the sources which you get the
                                                                                                                                   information finelly in the litreture reveiw.
                                                                                                                                 ² Submitt your litreture review to your teacher on
                                                                                                                                     due date.


                                                                                     7.0 Format for assessment and evaluation
                                                                                     :
                                                                                                                                                    Name of the student
                                                                                                      Criteria


                                                                                      1. Keep information accurately
                                                                                      2. Accuracey of information
                                                                                      3. Report reference sources accurately
                                                                                     4. Follows instructions
                                                                                     5. Prsents the litreture review attractively

                                                                                     Indicate Proficiency Levels as A,B,C or D

                                                                                            A - Excellent
                                                                                            B - Good
                                                                                            C - Average
                                                                                            D - Should Improve


                                                                                                                                       118
Tools for Extended Teaching - Learning Process

                                                                                     1.0 Evaluation                     : Term 2, Instrument 2

                                                                                     2.0 Competency levels covered      : 3.7 and 3.8

                                                                                     3.0 Subject content covered        : • Action of furance
                                                                                                                          • Fire extingusher and usage
                                                                                     4.0 Nature of Instrument           : Preparation of information leaflet

                                                                                     5.0 Objectives                     : 1. Awearness of using combustion productivity at
                                                                                                                            day to day life.
                                                                                                                         2. To improve communication skills through informa
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                            tion leaflet.

                                                                                     6.0 Instrutions for implementation :

                                                                                        For teachers                    • Encourage students to make a information leaflet.
                                                                                                                          relevent to " Action of furance and productivity
                                                                                                                          usage"or "fire extinguishers and accurate usage "
                                                                                                                        • Inform student about the source of information.
                                                                                                                        • Get student to refer the inforation leaflet issued by
                                                                                                                          various institutions.

                                                                                       For students                     • Prepair a information leaflet for public reguarding
                                                                                                                          " Action of furance and productivity usage" or "fire
                                                                                                                          extinguishers and accurate usage"
                                                                                                                        • Mark information which you have been collected
                                                                                                                         in infirmation leaflet concise, simple and atractive.
                                                                                                                        • Submit a prepaired infomation leaflet to your teacher
                                                                                                                          on due date.




                                                                                                                                 119
7.0 Format for assessment and evaluation :


                                                                                                                                        Names of Students


                                                                                                       Criteria
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                              • Relevance of information


                                                                                              • Presentation skills


                                                                                              • Creativity


                                                                                              • Reliability of information


                                                                                              • Completeness of information




                                                                                     Indicate Proficiency Levels as A,B,C or D

                                                                                            A - Excellent
                                                                                            B - Good
                                                                                            C - Average
                                                                                            D - Should Improve




                                                                                                                                  120
Tools for Extended Teaching - Learning Process

                                                                                     1.0 Evaluation                     : Term 2, Instrument 3

                                                                                     2.0 Competency levels covered      : 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.9, 3.10

                                                                                     3.0 Subject content covered        : • Classification of chemical reaction
                                                                                                                          • Investigate interactions between matter and
                                                                                                                            electricity.
                                                                                                                           • Investigate reaction pattern of pure metals
                                                                                                                           • Examine the rate of the reaction of chemical reac
                                                                                                                             tions.
Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.




                                                                                                                           • Get the necessary action to prevent metal corrision.
                                                                                                                           • Preparation of gases and examine properties.
                                                                                                                           • Invetigate Heat changes relevent to chemical
                                                                                                                             reactions

                                                                                     4.0 Nature of Instrument           : Chemistry practical workshop

                                                                                     5.0 Objectives                     : 1. To develope practical experiences relevant to
                                                                                                                            various chemical reactions.
                                                                                                                         2. To enhance maniuplations skills for setting experi-
                                                                                                                             mental appratus.
                                                                                                                         3. To direct the students on effective communication
                                                                                                                           through creations.

                                                                                     6.0 Instrutions for implementation :

                                                                                        For teachers                    • In this tool each student is involved in an individual
                                                                                                                          process as well as group process.
                                                                                                                        • Divide a class into seven groups and give the relevent
                                                                                                                          practical set.
                                                                                                                        • Provide the necessary facilities for practical test and
                                                                                                                          inform the students in advance the date at which they
                                                                                                                          have to conduct a workshop.
                                                                                                                        • Evaluate the students after the workshop.

                                                                                       For students                     • Present the practical test which is preplaned given by
                                                                                                                          teacher.
                                                                                                                        • Get the chance to present the relevent activity accu
                                                                                                                          rately
                                                                                                                        • Preplanned when the result of experiment is taken
                                                                                                                          several days.
                                                                                                                        • Plan the workshop when result of some experiment
                                                                                                                          is taken several days.

                                                                                                                                 121

Chemistry

  • 2.
    SCIENCE Teacher Instruction Manual Chemistry & Physics Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Grade 10 2007 Department of Science, Health & Physical Education Faculty of Science &Technology National Institute of Education
  • 3.
    Science Grade 10 Chemistry & Physics 2007 Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. © National Institute of Education ISBN- Department of Science, Health & Physical Education, Faculty of Science &Technology, National Institute of Education. Printing: NIE Press, National Institute of Education, Maharagama. i
  • 4.
    Message of theDirector General The first curriculum revision for the new millennium is based on the elimination of the several problems obtaining in the present education system. The present curriculum reforms have been planned having identified the problems that youth face consequent to the weakening of their thinking abilities, social abilities as well as personal abilities and step by step exploration of factors leading to this situation, to overcome which, the necessary background was prepared. Compared to the other countries in the Asian region, our country took the lead in education in earlier years. But most countries in this region have superceded Sri Lanka in education today. Some factors that influenced this deterioration are the action taken by educational institutions to continue to take action to confirm the known, learn that which had been decided on earlier, and reconstruct that which was, in the same form itself. All these matters have been taken into consideration and the officers of the National Institute of Education have endeavoured to prepare the new curriculum on the basis of a distinct philosophy. The primary objective here is to change that which is known, explore that which is new and develop that which is necessary for tomorrow and build up a generation of students who can display their readiness for a successful future. But there is no need to reiterate, the need for a visible change in the teacher’s role for the realization of this objective. In place of the obvious transactional teacher role presenting in our classrooms so far, the Sri Lankan school teacher will have to understand and conform to a student-centered, competency based and activity focused transformational role. It is our firm belief that this Teacher Instruction Manual will serve you as an aid to become an effective teacher through the provision of numerous instructions that will help you adapt to the new situation. Through the study of these instructions you will be provided the opportunity of making your daily teaching as well as the evaluation task easy. There is no doubt that instructions for student exploration and other quality inputs will help facilitate the teacher’s task. Similarly, the Teacher Instruction Manual will help convey to school principals valuable information they can use in time-tabling, sharing of limited resources and internal supervision. My sincere thanks go to Dr. Mrs. I. L. Ginige, Assistant Director General (Curriculum Development) Science & Technology Faculty of National Institute of Education for her direct involvement in the preparation of this Teacher Instruction Manual that will serve an immense purpose in the task performed at school level by the section above and also teacher educationist involved in beginning or continuous teacher educational matters, in-service advisors as well as officers at various levels, involved in external supervision plus monitoring programmes. Professor J. W. Wickramasinghe Director General National Institute of Education iii
  • 5.
    Preface The first curriculum reform for the millennium implemented with the aim of preparing a powerful basis for a new Sri Lanka anticipates a visible transformation of the teacher’s role. The three main sections below are included in the Teacher Instruction Manual prepared with the objective of providing the teacher with the necessary support in this regard. · Detailed Syllabus · Activity Continuum that helps in the implementation of the syllabus · Instruments for the extension of the learning teaching process. Teachers have been provided the opportunity of understanding several basic matters that have been taken into consideration in the preparation of the curriculum for the detailed syllabus extending beyond subject topics and sub-topics. Competency levels that correspond to subject competency have been included in this section that commences with an introduction to the factors and subject aims that formed the basis of the new syllabus. One special features of this section is that, while the knowledge-base determined under competency level each student needs to develop has been introduced as the subject content the multiple learning and teaching methods employed in transmitting this section to the student has also been taken into consideration in determining the time frame with respect to each competency level. The final part of the detailed syllabus presented under the heading “School Policy and Programs” needs to be studied very carefully and understood by every instructional leader. This section provides school managers a range of valuable instructions to assist them in the allocation for teaching, subject-teaching assigning functions to teachers, implementing co-curricular activities as well as supervision of the teacher’s task. The second section of the Teacher Instruction Manual has been prepared with the objective of providing teachers with clear understanding of the proposed learning- teaching methodology. This section commences with the introduction of the methods of planning activities under competency-based education as well as the change in the teacher’s role. Although the activity continuum necessary for the implementation of the curriculum has been introduced next, the implementation of the proposed activity in the very same manner is not expected of teachers. The teacher should endeavor to make use of his / her creative, as well as critical thinking abilities and adapt these activities in a manner that suits ones class, best. Although instructions have been provided on the constitution of groups in keeping with the facets of the problems subject to exploration, the teacher is expected to take an intelligent decision on the number of groups based on number of students in the class. iv
  • 6.
    Time has beenallocated for activities to ensure achievement of the relevant competency levels. Therefore, teachers may have to exceed the 40-minute period. While each activity has been provided adequate time for the actualization of each competency level, the teacher is expected to make use of single or double periods in the time table and breakdown these activities, as suitable in implementing them. For the success of the procedure it is essential that every time an activity commenced the previous day is carried over to the following day, that a brief summary of the part of the activity completed the previous day is presented to the class. Similarly, this decision will provide the school community with the opportunity of involving students in effective learning where teachers obtain leave of absence. The final item in this section is a list of quality inputs necessary for the maintenance of the quality of subject learning and teaching, when taken as a whole. As such, the teacher has a choice of ordering out the necessary learning-teaching materials in time and having them on hard. Included in the third part of the teacher Instruction Manual under the title “ Assessment and evaluation” are a number of important hints to ensure that the expected results of the exercise are realized. This section has been so structured as to introduce matters related to the assessment and evaluation that should take place under each activity, extension of the learning and teaching that takes place based on activity groups and the nature of the questions that might be expected in general examinations. It must be pointed out that the primary responsibility of the teachers is to Identify instances where assessment and evaluation can be implemented in the course of each activity and to carry out this task successfully on the basis of common criteria. The set of instruments prepared with a range of activities as the objective for the purpose of extending learning and teaching provide students with the opportunity of involvement in continuous learning outside the recommended classroom sessions. While it is the task of the teacher to regularly examine the learning students receive, based on these instruments, and encourage them, arriving at a correct decision regarding the final results of the activities and communicating that decision to the relevant parties is expected of the teacher. It is essential that a visible change takes place in general examinations for the success of the learning-teaching process. The National Institute of Education, with the assistance of the Sri-Lanka Department of Examinations, has introduced several prototype questions for educational levels that terminate with these examinations. Since this change in examination question papers has been suggested in order to direct students to learn through practice and experience, instead of resorting to mechanical approaches like memorizing or answering model question papers, the education of school students and parents about this change should commence at the beginning itself. v
  • 7.
    All teachers shouldrealize that various activities can be developed for the achievement of any particular competency level. Accordingly, they should be prepared for more successful teaching through the use of better approaches, exploration, as well as instruments for the extension of learning and teaching. The present Teacher Instruction Manual will give teachers right throughout the country the courage to effect a visible change in the teacher’s role and prevent their becoming inactive in the presence of new approaches. Similarly, we expect to award certificates and provide numerous development opportunities to teachers who go beyond the activities to involve themselves in the innovation of novel creations. What teachers have to do order in to become eligible to the awards is to improve these activities, using their creative thinking, and present them. Learning-teaching plans prepared in this manner outside the basic activity plan, should be forwarded to Assistant Director General ( Curriculum Development ), Science and Technology faculty, National Institute of Education, Sri Lanka. Selection of those entitled to awards will be made subsequent to the study of these activities by the relevant subject committees. We have endeavoured in this manner, to bring learning-teaching assessment and evaluation on to the same platform through new methodologies. According to this, teachers will be provided substantial latitude to meaningfully handle the learning-teaching process, school-based assessment, as well as assignment of home-work. It is our firm conviction that the school system of Sri Lanka will, make maximum use of this aid and depart from orthodox learning-teaching approaches to enhance the thinking abilities, social abilities as well as the individual abilities of the sons and daughters of the county. Dr. Indira Lilamani Ginige Assistant Director General (Curriculum Development), Faculty of Science and Technology , National Institute of Education, Sri Lanka. vi
  • 8.
    Direction: Prof. J W Wickremasinghe - Director General Guidance: Dr. I. L. Ginige Assistant Director General Faculty of Science and Technology National Institute of Education Supervision : Mr. C M R Anthony Director Department of Science, Health & Physical Education Instructional leadership, Co-ordination and Editing : Mr. C M R Anthony - Director Mr. G H Gauthamadasa - Chief Project Officer Mr. W A D Rathnasuriya - Chief Project Officer Mr. W A Sumathipala - Project Officer Ms.J Athamlebbe - Project Officer Mr. A D A de Silva - Project Officer Mr. L K Waduge - Project Officer Mr. P Malavipathirana - Project Officer Ms. Nadee Ama Jayasekera - Project Officer Ms. H M Mapagunaratne - Asst. Project Officer Translation : Mr. R.B.A.Jayasekara Computer page setting : Mr. K.Wimalasena, Mahinda College, Galle. Art : Ms. U L N Fernando Teacher Service, Sirimavo Bandaranayake BV. Colombo.07. Cover page and pictures : Master. Soraj Dhananjaya Kolonne, Grade 11, Thurstan College, Colombo. vii
  • 9.
    Contents Page ² Director General’s Message iii ² Preface iv ² Contributors vi ² Contents vii ² School Policies and Progammes 15 · Learning-Teaching Methodology Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² Introduction 18-20 ² Quality Inputs 21 ² Activity Continuum 22-114 · Assessment and Evaluation ² Introduction 117-118 ² Tools for Extended Learning 119 -124 ² Prototype Questions 125 -129 viii
  • 10.
    Competency 1.0 ( Investigates Scientific findings about structure of matter and quantity Competency level 1.1( Discuss the scientific findings about the structure of atom. Activity 1.1 ( Let us go inside the atom. Time ( 120 minutes Quality inputs ( ² Photograph of a nuclear reactor.annex 1.1.1 ² Three copies of instructions for exploration given in annex 1.1.2 • ² Three copies of the article"Let us get inside Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. the atom"annex 1.1.3 ² Demy papers and pastels Teaching-learning process ( Step 1.1.1 ( ² Display the photograph to the class. ² Inquire from the children as to what know about what is given in the picture ² Conduct a brain storming discussion to highlight the following. That, ² In an atomic reactor,the energy in the atoms is transformed into energy that is useful to man. ² atom is the building blocks of matter. ² The findings about the atom can be made use of for the benefit of man. (15 minutes) Step 1.1.2 ( ² Divide the class into three groups. ² Provide the groups with copies of instructions for exploration. ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration. ² Prepare them to present their findings to the class. (60 minutes) Step 1.1.3 ( ² Get each group to present their findings to the class. ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to elaborate on the presentation. ² Get the other groups to propose constructive sugges tions, ² Elaborate highlighting the following points. 9
  • 11.
    That, ² Atom is a particle with a small mass. ² Fundamental sub atomic paticles inclued in an atom are electrons,protons and neutrons. ² Out of the paticles the lightest particle is the electron. ² mass of an electron is about 9.1095x 10-31 kg ² electron is a particle with a negative charge. ² Scientists J.J Thompson,Millikan Cotributed to the fundamental studies about the electron . ² Proton is a partical having a mass of about 1840 Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. times the mass of an electron. ² Mass of a proton is about 1.6725x10-31kg ² Proton is a particle with a positive charge. ² Proton is symbolised as 11p ² Ernest Rutherford contributed to the fundamental studies about the proton. ² Neutron is a partical which has a mass almost equal to that of a proton. ² Mass of a neutron is about 1.6750x10-20 kg. ² Neutron is a particle with no charge,it is neutral. ² Neutron is symbolised as 10n ² The number of electron or the number of protons in an atom of an element is identical to that element. ² According to J.J Thompasons"Plum pudding "model he stated that an atom is a sphere which is positively charged,and the electrons which are negatively charged are embeded in it. ² According to Rutherford solar model the protons,and neutrons are collected at the centre which is the nucleus and the electrons are moving in orbits around it. ² These shells are named as K.L.M.N from centre out wards (45 mts) 10
  • 12.
    Criteria for assessmentand evaluation ² Names and describe the fundamental sub atomic particles. ² Appreciates that scientists have contributed to the findings about the atomic structure. ² Compare different atomic models. ² Collect data about scientific discoveries using references. ² Present fact in an alternative way. Annex 1.1.1 Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. a 11
  • 13.
    Annex 1.1.2 Instructions for group exploration ² Given below are three types of sub atomic particles in an atom. ² Electron ² Proton ² Neutron ² Focus your attention on the sub atomic particle relevant to you. ² With reference to the reading material provided to you discuss the follwing about the sub atomic particle relevant toyou. ² It`s discovery Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² Properties ² How it is placed in the atom according to different atomic models. ² Be prepared to present your findings to the class. Annex 1.1.3 Let us go inside the atom Atom is derived from the Greek word "atomos" which means ,not divisible further but later it was discovered that it is made up sub atomic particles.Although there are many Sub atomic particles only three important particles are mentioned below. 1& Electron In the middle of the nineteenth century Scientists drew their attention whether it is possible to conduct through gases In 1875 B.C Crooks observed that in a closed glass tube with ends having two electrodes and a high voltage is applied and in the meantime the air pressure inside to tube is gradually reduced,there is a glow near the cathode.Further he noticed that if the air pressure is further reduced this glow gradually move from the cathode towards the anode,and that there is a"shadow" between the cathode and the anode.When the pressure inside the tube is about 1 pascall he noticed that the shadow got distributed throughout the tube and that there is an emission of a beam of rays from the cathode to the anode.Since these rays were emitted from the cathode they were named as cathode rays by crooks.This set up is called the cathode ray tube. In (1858BC-1940BC) J.J.Thompson conducted further experiments with these rays,As a result of these experiments following conclusions were arrived at about the prop- erties of cathode rays. 1 Cathode rays move in straight lines. 2 They are negatively charged 3 They are made up of particles having a mass. 12
  • 14.
    J.J.Thompson conducted anexperiment to determine the (e/m ) ratio of the cathode ray particales, where (e) is the charge and (m) is the mass. The value he got for e/m was very large e/m=1.76x10 c kg-1 The values obtained for e/m ratio for the cathode rays using different gases and different cath- odes is the same.By this Thompson concluded that the cathode rays consists of the same particles.Further Thompson stated that,the fundamental unit of electricity,the electron introduced by J.J. Stony in 1874 B.C.is the negatively charge particles in the cathode rays. Electron is a common sub atomic particle present in all atoms. Charge of an electron = 1.602x10-19 C Mass of an electron = 9.1095x10-31 kg At present different forms of cathode ray tubes are used in various electronic instruments. Some of these are TV photo tube,Computer monitor,Cathode ray Oscilloscope, Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Fluorescent tube High Voltage Cathode Anode To Vaccum Pump Simple Cathode Ray Emitting Tube Proton In 1886 B.C. E.Goldstien observed that when using a porous Cathode,is subjected to a voltage from 20,000V to 50,000V some special rays were seen to emit from the pores in the Cathode in a direction opposite to the Cathode rays.He named them as positive rays. When ratio e/m was calculated for the particles in these positive rays it was found that the value is numerically smaller to that of the particles in the cathode rays. When different gases were used in the Cathode ray tube the e/m ratio for the particles in the possitive rays were found to be whole numerical multiples of the e/m ratio for the particles in the possitive rays.When Hydrogen gas is used in the cathode ray tube.In short the lightest possitive rays particles were obtained from Hydrogen.In 1871 B.C-!937B.C Rutherford,named this lightest possitive ray particle as proton and also that it should be the common possitively charged funda- mental particle of all matter. Charge of a proton=1.602x10-19C Mass of a proton=1.6726x10-27 Kg Mass of a proton is 1840 times the mass of an electron. 13
  • 15.
    High Voltage Anode Cathode with a slit production of possitive rays Neutron Possitively charged particles named α particles are emitted from radio active sources.When fall on to the instrument to detect charged particals, it causes a deflection.(Fig. a) In 1932 James Chadwick conducted an experiment form which it was founded that when a thin Berylium sheet was place in between the radio active source and the detector no deflection was seen ( Fig. b) When a paraffin sheet was place between the Berylium sheet and the detector tere was a α deflection. (Fig. c) Source of Detector particals Shows deflection (a) Possitive charge particals fall on detector Berylium plate No deflection is shown (b) charged particals are not falling on the Berylium plate Paraffin wax plate detector Shows a deflection (c) charged particals fall on the detector particals Chargeless Neutrons Particals with possitive charge (d) 14
  • 16.
    Chadwick showed thatwhen α Particles strikes the beryllium sheet it releases particles which has no charge.When these particles strikes the paraffin sheet,it releases charged particles and as a result there is a deflection in the detector.(Figd) He also found that when particles strikes the beryllium sheet,the uncharged particles emitted from it has a mass equal to that of the Hydrogen atom. He stated that these particles are another type of sub atomic particles and named them as neutrons. mass of a neutron = 1.6750x10-27 kg Thompsons` Atomic Model(Plum pudding model) Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. α Rutherford`s model of the atom(Solar model) s Using rays emitted by radioactive material,in 1911 Geiger and Marsden conducted an experiment to find the στρucture of matter under the direction of Rutheford.Here a beam of particles was obtained using radio active polonium kept in a lead chamber with a slit.In this experiment a thin gold foil was bombarded with particles.They kept a screen painted with Zinc sulphide to detect the direction in which the particles move.There was a glow when particles struck the Zinc sulphide sheet. Rutherford's gold leaf experiment Source of Polonium Zinc Sulphide screen which could move around the gold leaf Thin gold leaf Led block with the hole 15
  • 17.
    In this experimentit was discovered that most of the Alpha particals went through the gold foil without any deviation, a small number of Alpha particals deviated when going through the gold foil and a very small number were reflected. The reason why most of the Alpha particals went through without any difficulty was because according to Rutherford a major part of an atom is empty space. Atom α particals Nucleis Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. particals not diverging Reflected particals particals diverging Model to explain the results of Rutherfords experiment α Further according to Rutherford possitively charged particles some deviated and some reflected because there are small areas inside atom where possitive charges are collected together.These possitively charged areas he called nucleui.Later Rutherford Put forward a theory according which he says,electrons are revolving in circular orbits around the nucleus,like the planets are revolving round the sun. electron nucleus path 16
  • 18.
    Competency 1.0 ( Investigates Scientific findings about structure of matter and quantity Competency level 1.2 ( Use Scientific Conventions to highlight diversity in atoms Activity 1.2 ( Let us Investigates about atoms, make models, study about diversity. Time ( 120 minutes Quality inputs ( ² Poster showing the planetary modle structure of Helium and Sodium included in annex 1.2.1 ² Four copies of instructions for exploration given in Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. annex 1.1.2 ² Four copies of the article"Looking at an atom with an exploratory eye", included in annex 1.2.3 ² Beads of three colours or small rigifoam balls.,bucket wires,gum,ekle and thread ² Demy papers and pastels Teaching-learning process ( Step 1.21 ( ² Display to the class the poster showing the structure of Helium and Sodium atoms. ² Conduct a brain storming session to highlight the following.facts. That, ² The shells in an atom from nucleus outwards are named K, L, M, N ² Helium atom has two electrons in the K shell Sodium atom has K, L, M, Shells with 2,8,1 electrons respectively. • ² The highest number of electrons K,L,M,N shells could have is 2, 8, 8,18 ² The arrangement of electrons in the shells around the nucleus of an atom is called electronic configuration ² The electronic configuration of an atom is one convention which indicate the identify of an atom. (15 minutes) 17
  • 19.
    ² Provide theclass with copies of instructions for exploration.material for making models,the letter,demy paper and pastel ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration. ² Prepare them to present their findings to the class. (60 minutes) Step 1.2.3 ( ² Get each group to present their findings to the class. ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to elaborate on the presentation. ² Get the other groups to propose constructive sugges tions, ² Elaborate highlighting the following points. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. That, ² In Chemistry there are 110 elements discovered at present. ² Every elements is symbolized using the letters in the English Alphabet. ² Atomic number is the number of protons in the nucleus of the atom. ² In a neutral atom the number of electrons(- charges)and the number of protons (+chargs) are equal. ² In the atomic nucleus both types of sub atomic particles,protons and neutrons are present. ² In an element the number of protons is constant. But there are atoms with varying number of neutrons. ² The total number of Protons and neutrons in the nucleus of the atom is called the mass number or the number of nucleons. ² Atoms of an element having identical number of protons but different number of neutrons the mass number varies.These atoms are called isotopes. ² In a chemical symbol of an atom on the top left side is the mass number and at bottom is the atomic number. ( 12C ) 6 ² The relative mass of an atom is the number of times the mass of the atom relative to 1/12 of the mass of 12 6C isotope atom. 18
  • 20.
    ² Relative atomicmass=mass of an atom of an element/massof 12 6C isotope atomx 1/12 (45 minuts) Criteria for assessment and Evaluation ² Names and describe conventions related to identification of elements. ² Appreciates that diversity of matter is built on diversity of atoms. ² Contruct models to show the structure of atoms. ² Show diversity by using Symbols. ² Discover facts using various Sources. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Arrangement of sub - Atomic particals in Helium and Sodium He Atom ² K Shell Electronic configuration 2 ² Na Atom ² K Shell ²² ² ² ² ² L Shell ² M Shell ² ²² Electronic configuration 2" 8" 1 19
  • 21.
    Annex 1.2.2 Instructions for group exploration ² Focus your attention to the six atoms assigned to your group, according to the table given below. Data of some atoms Symbol A B C D E F G H I J K L MNO P QR S T UV WX (not the standard ) Number of Protons 1 4 1 12 17 19 2 6 7 13 6 18 3 8 11 8 15 20 5 9 10 14 10 16 Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Number of 1 4 1 12 17 19 2 6 7 13 6 18 3 8 11 8 15 20 5 9 10 14 10 16 Electrons Number of 1 5 2 12 18 20 2 6 7 14 7 22 4 8 12 9 16 20 6 10 10 1412 16 Neutrons Group i Group ii Group iii Group iv ² Using data given in the table and the artical " Looking at the atom with an exploratory eye" find the standard chemical symbols to the elements provided to you. ² Find the atomic mass and mass number of the atoms provided to you by using the types of sub atomic particals and their numbers. ² Develope the eletronic configuration of the respective elements by writing the number of eletrons in the cells from closer to the nucleus outwards. ² Develope using the letter discuss about isotopes and relative atomic mass and find out the facts. ² Select necessary item from the common table and construct solar models of atoms allocated to you. ² Be prepared to present constructions and findings to the class. 20
  • 22.
    Annex 1.2.3 "Looking at an atom with an exploratory eye" Do you know that all matter solids, liquids and gases found in your environment is formed by 110 elements getting grouped together in different ways ? Each of these elements are formed from building units called atoms.Although it is not possible to look at an Atom or its interior using the naked eye, the way the scientists by performing varius experiments have been able to learn about the structure of these is amazing. To begin with let us find about the sub atomic particals of atoms. Sub Atomic Particals Element Symbol Number of Number of Num,ber of Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Electrons Protons Neutrons Hydrogen H 1 1 -- Helium He 2 2 2 Lithium Li 3 3 4 Berelium Be 4 4 5 Boron B 5 5 6 Carbon C 6 6 6 Nitrogen N 7 7 7 Oxygen O 8 8 8 Fluorine F 9 9 10 Neon Ne 10 10 10 Sodium Na 11 11 12 Magnesium Mg 12 12 12 Aluminium Al 13 13 14 Silicon Si 14 14 14 Phosparous P 15 15 15 Sulphur S 16 16 16 Chlorine Cl 17 17 18 Argon Ar 18 18 22 Potasium K 19 19 20 Calcium Ca 20 20 20 Every element has a chemical symbol denoted by letters in the English alphabet. For easy study it is possible to arrange the number of ptotons in the atomic nucleus of all the elements found in the world. Now let us find out some theories about atoms. 21
  • 23.
    Data of Elementsof atomic numbers 1 - 20 Number of Electrons in the Name of Chemical Atomoc shells Mass Relative Element Symbol Number (Electronic configuration) number Atomic mass K L M N Hydrogen H 1 1 1 1 Helium He 2 2 4 4 Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Lithium Li 3 2 1 7 6'9 Beralium Be 4 2 2 9 9 Boron B 5 2 3 11 10'8 Carbon C 6 2 4 12 12 Nitrogen N 7 2 5 14 14 Oxygen O 8 2 6 16 16 Fluvorin F 9 2 7 19 19 Neon Ne 10 2 8 20 20'2 Sodium Na 11 2 8 1 23 23 Magnisium Mg 12 2 8 2 24 24'3 Aluminium Al 13 2 8 3 27 27 Silicon Si 14 2 8 4 28 28'1 Phosporus P 15 2 8 5 31 31 Sulphur S 16 2 8 6 32 32'1 Clorine Cl 17 2 8 7 35 35'5 Argon Ar 18 2 8 8 40 40 Potasium K 19 2 8 8 1 39 39'1 Calsium Ca 20 2 8 8 2 40 40'1 22
  • 24.
    Atomic Number The atomicnumber of an element is the number of protons in the atom of that element.(In a neutral atom the number of protons in the nucleus is equal to the number of electrons in the shells.) Mass number The mass number of an element is the sum of the protons and neutrons in the atomic nucleus of that element, Relative atomic Mass You could understand that atoms are particles having a very small mass hence it is not useful in Chemistry to use the international unit of mass,the kilogram in relation to the mass of an atom. Hence the mass of an atom is stated as a relative value of a standard unit.It is called the Relative atomic mass unit. 12 Relative atomic mass Unit = mass of 6 C Isotope atom 12 The relative atomic mass of an atom is the number of times the mass of that atom in relation to the relative atomic mass unit.It could be stated as Relative atomic mass = mass of an atom atomic mass unit Relative atomic mass = mass of an atom of an element 12 mass of an atom of 6 C isotope x 1/12 There are differences between the atoms of the same element.An example of this is the presence of atoms of elements with same number of protons but with different number of neutrons,Such elements where the number of protons in the atomic nucleus is the same but the number of neutrons vary,and as a result they vary in their mass number.These are called isotopes. A Symbol is used to identify an atom.In an atomic symbol at the top left is the mass number 12 and at the bottom is the atomic number( 6 C) 23
  • 25.
    Annex 1.2.6 Data about some of the isotopes found in nature of some elements Name of Atomic Mass Symbol of Number of Number of Number of element number number the isotope protons Neutrons Electrons in the in the in the nucleus nucleus nucleus Hydrogen 1 1 1 H 1 0 1 1 1 2 2 1 H 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 H 1 2 1 3 Helium 2 3 2 He 2 1 2 2 4 4 2 He 2 2 2 Lithium 3 6 6 3 Li 3 3 3 3 7 7 Li 3 4 3 3 10 Boron 5 10 5 B 5 5 5 5 11 11 5 B 5 6 5 Carbon 6 12 12 6 C 6 6 6 6 13 13 C 6 7 6 6 14 Nitrogen 7 14 7 N 7 7 7 7 15 15 7 N 7 8 7 16 Oxygen 8 16 8 O 8 8 8 17 8 17 8 O 8 9 8 8 18 18 8 O 8 10 8 20 Neon 10 20 10 Ne 10 10 10 21 10 22 10 Ne 10 11 10 10 22 22 10 Ne 10 12 10 Sulpher 16 32 32 S 16 16 16 16 16 33 33 S 16 17 16 16 16 34 34 S 16 18 16 16 24
  • 26.
    Chlorine 17 35 35 Cl 17 18 17 17 17 37 37 Cl 17 20 17 17 39 Potasium 19 39 19 K 19 20 19 19 40 40 19 K 19 21 19 19 41 41 19 K 19 22 19 40 20 40 Ca 20 20 20 Calcium 20 42 20 42 20 Ca 20 22 20 43 20 43 20 Ca 20 23 20 44 20 44 20 Ca 20 24 20 46 20 46 20 Ca 20 26 20 48 20 48 20 Ca 20 28 20 25
  • 27.
    Competency 1.0 ( Investigates Scientific findings about the structure of matter and quantity. Competency level 1.3 ( Explain the Properties of compounds using it`s bonds. Activity 1.3 ( Let us Investigates the Properties of compounds using it`s bonds. Time ( 120 minutes Quality inputs ( ² Atomic models arranged according to instructions in annex 1.3.1 ² Two copies of instructions for exploration given in Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. annex 1.3.2 ² Two work stations arranged according to instructions given in annexe 1.3.3 ² Two copies of the article "Chemical bonds" given in annex 1.3.4 ² Demy papers and pastels Teaching-learning process ( Step 1.3.1 ( ² Join the atomic models accordingly with the help of the students. ² Lead a discussion highlighting the following points. ² Bonds are formed between atoms by the electron. ² Two electrons join to form a bond between two atoms. ² When a chemical bond is formed ,the atoms that go to form the bond behave the following fashion. ² One atom donates an electron from its last energy level to the other atom. ² The election donated by one atom is accepted by the other atom. ² The positive ion formed by the donation of the eletron and the negative ion formed by the acceptance of electron are attracted. ² When there is no formation of ions,electron pairs are shared between two atoms ² During the formation of bonds the atoms try to achieve the maximum inert gas configuration.
  • 28.
    . ² An atom reach the maximum nobel gas configuration by forming one or more bonds. ² Molecules are formed by atoms joining together by chemical bonds. ² A molecules consists of two or more atoms which may be homogeneous or heterogeneous. ² When chemical bonds form between heterogeneous atoms compounds are formed. ² It is possible to develop the chemical equation of a com pound by indicating the different number of atoms in a Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. compound molecule using the symbols of elements. (15 mts) Step 1.3.2 : ² Divide the class into two groups. ² Provide the groups with instruction for exploration the article,demy papers and pastel. ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration. ² Prepare them to present their findings to the whole class. (60 mts) Step 1.1.3 (² Get each group to present their findings to the class. ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to elaborate on the presentation. ² Get the other groups to propose constructive suggestions, ² Elaborate highlighting the following points. That, ² Atoms of elements by releasing electrons become positive ions,and by receiving electrons become negative ions. ² The positive ions are named cations and the negative ions as anions. ² There are ions which are formed from a single atom or from a number of atoms. ² Oppositely charged ions are attracted together and thereby forming ionic bonds, ² When ions get together to form a compound,the arrange ment of ions in space is called the ionic lattice.
  • 29.
    ² The ioniccompounds have the following inherent properties. ² Solid crystalline substances made up of ions. ² Have high melting points and boiling points. ² Soluable in polar liquids. ² Conducts electricity in the fused state as well as in solution. ² A molecule is a unit formed by the union of more than one atom of similar or dissimilar elements. ² Atoms of some elements in the solid state are arranged in a definite pattern in space. ² The structures which are formed by the arrangement of atoms of elements in a definite pattern are called atomic lattice. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² Some compound molecules,in the solid state,are arranged in a definite pattern in space. ² The structures formed by the arrangement of compound molecules in a definite pattern in space are known as molecular lattice. ² When bonds are formed the presence of electrons are indicated by a dottod cross. ² A single bond between two atom is indicated by a short line in between them. ² Depending on the number of electron pair which go to from the bond,the bonds are known as single bond,double bond or a triple bond. ² The electron pairs in the valency orbit that do not take part in the formation of bonds are called lone electron pairs. ² The compounds which are formed by covalent bonds have the following properties. ² Mostly occur as neutral molecules made up of a number of atoms. ² Occur in Solid,liquid,and gaseous state. ² Most compounds have low melting points and boiling points. ² Some are soluble in water. ² Do not conduct electricity in aqueous solution. ² The ability of an element to combine or its combining power is called valency. ² The number of electrons of an atom of an element that take part in the bonds is equal to its valency. ² Ions as well as radicals have a valency. (45 mts.)
  • 30.
    Criteria for Assessmentand evaluation : ² Explain how ionic and covalent bonds are formed. ² Accepts the fact that there is a relationship between the chemi cal properties of a compound and the nature of bonds. ² Investigates the physical properties of ionic and covalent bonds. ² Use symbols as a method of presenting data. ² Make use of models to video concept. Annexe 1.3.1 Instructons to prepare models : Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Make models,as given in the diagrams,using the rigifoam sheets. H Na Mg Mg O O N Cl
  • 31.
    Annexe 1.3.2 Instructions for group exploration • You are intrested with the exploration of one of the two main groups of classifications of chemical compounds according to the nature of their bonds. • Covalent bonds • Ionic bonds • Using the article on chemical bonds,discuss about the nature of the bonds with regard to the compounds allocated to you. • Present by using models and symbols how the bonds are formed in the type of compounds allocated to you giving three examples. • Calculate the relative molecular mass of the compounds making use of the relative atomic Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. mass. • Find the combining power of ions,groups of ions or atoms in the compounds provided. • Find out whether there are other compounds which could be developed from these ions,ion groups,or atoms. • Investegate the solubility in water,physcial nature,heating in the air and conduction of electricity by an aqueous solution of the compounds in your work station. • Be prepared to present your finding to the class. Annex 1.3.3 Instructions for setting up workstations • Work station 1 • Sodium chloride • Calcium hydroxide • Copper sulphate • Work station 2 • Glucose • Ethanol • Urea • Keep the following materials in both workstations. • water • Two drycells • One metre of connecting wire • Torch bulb • Two carbon rods • Two beakers • Tin cover and holder • Burning spirit lamp
  • 32.
    Annex 1.3.4 Chemical bonds Ionic bonds,ionic compounds and their properties. An ion is a positively or negatively charged atom or a cluster of atoms. Na atom Na+ ion + e Mg atom Mg2+ion + 2e Cl atom + e Cl- ion S atom + 2e S2-ion Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Examples for ions formed by a cluster of atoms are given below.These are known as ion radicals. Ammonium ion(NH4)+ Nitrate ion(NO3)- Sulphate ion(SO4)2- Phosphate ion(PO4)3- In electric fields positive ions are attracted to the cathode and the negative ions to the anode.As such if the charge in the ion is positive it is called a cation and if the charge is negative it is called an anion. Ionic bonds is formed between positive ion formed by donating completely one or more electron in the outer most shell of one atom to another atom,and the negative ions formed by accepting those electrons.This is due to electro statatic attraction between the oppositely charged ions. Consider following examples. Ionic compounds have the following endemic properties. • consist of ions which are oppositely charged. • Mostly occur as crystalline solid substances. 1. The Nature of Bonding in Sodium chloride ²² ²² × × × ²² × × ²² × ² × ² × × ² ²² ² ²→ × × ×² ²² ²² × × ²² × × ²² × ² × ² × × ²² ×× ²² ²² ²² Sodium Atom Chlorine Atom Sodium ion Chloride ion (Na) (Cl) (Na+) (Cl-)
  • 33.
    2' The Natureof Bonding in Lithium Oxide Oxygen Atom LithiumAtom × × Lithium Atom • × • × × Li • O • Li • × • × × Lithium ion Oxide ion × × 2- Lithium ion + × + • • Li × × • O • Li • × • × × 3' The Nature of Bonding in Magnisium Oxide × 2- × → (Mg)2+ × O Mg × O Magnisium Oxide ^MgO& 4' The Nature of Bonding in Calcium Chloride _ Cl × Cl × → (Ca)2+ _ Ca × × Cl Cl Calcium Chloride ^CaCl2&
  • 34.
    Ionic compounds havethe following endermic properties. • Consist of ions which are oppositly charged. • Mostly occur as crystaline solide subtances. • High melting points and boiling points. • Most soluble in water. • Conducts electricity in aqueous solutions and in the fused state.(heated and liquified) Covalent bonds and properties of covalent compounds A molecule is an electrically neutral cluster of atoms which is made up of more than one atom which are of the same element or different elements by sharing electrons. Here the electrons are shared in such a way that the atoms achieve the electronic configuration of noble gases. Each of these shared pair of electrons is a chemical bond.It is indicated by a single short line. • + • H × H → H × H Two Hydrogen Atoms Hydrogen molecule Outer most shell has one electron One electron pair keep share In order to obtain of full outer energy level and gain the electron configuration of the nobel gas Helium •• ×× •• ×× • • + × • • × • Cl Cl → • Cl × Cl × × × •• ×× •• ×× Two Chlorine atoms Chlorine molecule (Cl2) Outer most shell has seven One electron pair keep share in orde to obtain electrons of full outer energy level and gain the electron configuration of the nobel gas Argon
  • 35.
    × ² ² × ² ² × ² ² + × O × → ² O × × O ² × O ²² ×× Two Oxygen atoms Oxygen Molecule (O2) Outer most shell has six electrons. Two electrons pair keep share.In order to obtain of full outer energy level and gain the electron configuration of nobel gas Neon × ² ² ² ² + × × × → ² × ² × ² N N ² N × ² N × × ² × Two Nitrogen atoms Nitrogen molecule (N2) Outer most shell has five electrons Three electron pain keep share. In order to obtain of full outer energy level and gain the electron configuration of nobel gas Neon Similarly stucture of water molecule can be shown as follows. ×× ² H H ² × × × × × → × ² × × × × ² H H Oxygen atom Two Hydrogen atoms Water molecule ^H2O&
  • 36.
    Pay your attentionto the nature of bonds of Carbon dioxide and Amonia molecules given below. ×× × × × ² × × × × × × × ² ² ² → ² × × ×× ² ² × ² × ×× × × × Carbon atom Carbon dioxide molecule (CO2) × Two Oxygen atoms ² H × ×× × ² × H → × × N H ² N ² H × × ² Nitrogen atom ² H H Three Hydrogen atoms Ammonia molecule (NH3)
  • 37.
    The number ofshort lines drawn between the atoms shows the number of electron pairs shared by the atoms.If the number of shared electron pairs is one,it called a single bond,if two a double bond and if three, a triple bond. When the bonds are indicated by short lines the electrons in the outermost shell which do not take part in bonds should also be indicated. •• •• •• •• H-H • Cl Cl • O O • N N• • • •• •• • •• •• • Covalent compounds have the following endemic properties. •Mostly occur as small neutral molecules made up of few atoms. •Occur in the solid,liquid and gaseous states. •Most compounds have low melting points and boiling points. •Some are soluble in water. •Do not conduct electricity in aqueous solution. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Ionic lattice The structure which indicates how the ions are arranged in a three dimensional space in a chemical compound is called an ionic lattice.In the case of some elements the atoms are arranged in a lattice.The structure of arrangement of atoms which are joined by covalence bond is a three dimentional space is called an atomic lattice. Eg1: Carbon-Graphite Eg. NaCl ionic lattice
  • 38.
    Every atom ofcarbon in graphite exit in a two dimensional lattice by combining with three other carbon atom by single bonds.Graphite blocks are formed by arranging these layers one on top of another.The bonds between these layers are weak and as a result one layer could slide over another easily. Because of this graphite is used as a lubricant. Eg2: Carbon-diamond Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. In Diamond every carbon atom forms four covalent bonds with four other carbon atoms and as indicated in the diagram in the form of a three dimensional lattice.Diamond has a high value because it is the hardest substance in nature and is also because it is a very rare and attractive mineral. Making use of the fact that it is the hardest substance it is used to make delicate parts of instruments which should not be wasted and in glass cutting. Molecular lattice some elements which occur as molecules or molecules of compounds sometimes are arranged in space as a lattice.The structure which indicates the three dimensional arrangement of molecules in space is called amolecular lattice. Eg. Moleculer lattice of Silicon dioxide ( SiO2)
  • 39.
    The combining poweror the combining ability of an element known its' valency. The following table indicates the valency of some elements and ion radials. Valency 1 2 3 Lithium Li+ Magnesium Mg2+ Aluminium Al3+ Sodium Na+ Calcium Ca2+ Iron(III) Fe3+ Metal Potassium K+ Copper(II) Cu2+ Silver Ag+ Zinc Zn2+ Copper^I& Cu+ Irona(II) Fe2+ Lead Pb2+ Barium Ba2+ Hydrogen H+ Oxide O2- Nitride N3- Non Fluoride F- Sulphide S2- Metal Chloride Cl- Bromide Br- Hydride H- Hydroxide OH- Carbonate CO32- Phosphate PO43- Nitrate NO3- Sulphate SO42- Iron + Radical Ammoinum NH4 Hydrogen HCO3- Carbonate The chemical formula of a compound is by using symbols and the number of different atoms in the molecule of the compound, H2 In the hydrogen molecule there are two hydrogen atoms. Cl2 In the chlorine molecule there are two chlorine atoms NH3 In the Ammonia molecule, there is one Nitrogen atom and three hydrogen atoms. H2SO4 In Sulphuric acid molecule, two atoms of hydrogen, one atom of sulpher and four atoms of Oxigen When a compound if formed by atoms of two elements they must be constructed in such a way so as to balance the valencies of atom
  • 40.
    Example- 1. Sodium chioride is made of univalent Na+ ion and univalent Cl- ion combining .Formula - NaCl 2. Magnesium chloride is made by bivalent Mg2+ ion and two univalent Cl- ions.-Formula- MgCl2 3. Magnesium oxide is made up of bivalent Mg2+ ion and bi valent oxygen O2- ion combining formula -MgO 4. Sodium hydroxide is formed by univalent Na+ combining with uni valent(OH)- ion.Formula-NaOH 5. Sodium carbonate is formed by two ions of univalent Na+ and bivalent (CO3)2- . Formula Na2CO3 6. Copper sulphate is formed by bivalent Cu2+ combining with bivalent (SO4)2- ion, Formula CuSO4 7. Aluminium sulphate is formed by two atoms of trivalent Al3+ ion Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. combining with three ions of bivalent (SO42-)ions . Formula Al2(SO4)3 8. Water molecule is formed by two atoms of univalent hydrogen combining with one atom of bivalent oxygen. Formula H2O 9. To develop the above formulae the valency of atoms,ions or ion radicals of simple compounds could be made use of,seewhether it is possible to draw a connection between the formula of the compound and the valency of atom or ion radicals using the above example.
  • 41.
    Competency 1.0( Investigates the Scientific findings about the structure of matter and quantity. Competency level 1.4 Use mole to quantify elements and Compounds. Activity 1.4 ( Let us quantify matter. Time ( 120 minutes Quality inputs ( ² An enlarged copy of data table given in annexe 1.4.1 ² Two copies of instructions for exploration given in annexe 1.4.2 ² Demy papers and pastels Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Teaching-learning process ( Step 1.4.1 ( ² Asks from the students that if the mass of a two rupee coin is 8g what is the easiest way to seperate ten thousand of those coins. ² Exhibit the data table to the class. ² Direct students to get together in group of two and calcu late the number of atoms in a relative mass of an atom,in grammes,or the number of molecule in grammes. ² Lead a discussion highlighting the following facts. ² The number of atoms in a relative atomic mass of an element in grammes has been calculated to be about 6.022x1023 ² The number of molecules in a relative molecular mass of a compound in grammes has to be calculated to be about 6.022x1023 ² The number of atoms in a relative atomic mass of an element in grammes or the number of the molecules in a relative molecular mass of a compound in grammes is 6.022x1023 ² A mole of a substance is 6.022x1023 fundamental enti ties of that substance 6.022x1023ffundamental units which make up matter,the atom,molecule,ion,subatomic particles is called a mole of that matter. ² Mole is an international unit which measure the quantity of matters.
  • 42.
    ² The numberof fundamental units included in a mole is constant,this constant called the Avogardo Constant(L or NA) ( ² Avogadro constant is NA= 6.022 x 1023 mol-1 ² The mass of a mole of substance is called the molecu lar mass of that substance.(M) Eg.In a mole of carbon atom mass of 6.022x1023 carbon atom is 12g Hence molecular mass of carbon is 12gmol-1 Eg.In a mole of water there are 6.022x1023 molecules of water.Its` mass is 18g.Hence the molecular mass of water is 18gmol-1 Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² The value of the mass of an element when stated in grammes is equal to the relative atomic mass of that element. ² The value of the mass of a mole of compound when stated in grammes is the relative molecular mass of that compound. ² When it is required to weight substance of small mass like atoms,molecules ,it is easy to weight the required amount of that substance. ² When we want to seperate a quantity of substance,the knowledge of the molecular mass of that substance is useful. (15 minutes) Step 1.4.2 ( ² Divide the class into three groups. ² Provide each group with copies of the article instruc tions for exploration,demy paper and marker pens. ² Assign tasks and engage groups in exploration. ² Prepare them to present their findings to the class. (60 minutes) Step 1.4.3 ² Get groups to present their findings to the class. ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to elaborate on the
  • 43.
    presentation. ² Get the other groups to propose Constructive suggestions. ² Summerize highlighting the following points. ² If the mass of an element/compound(m),and the number of moles of Atoms/molecules(n) The relationship is n=m/M ² The mass of a quantity of moles(n)of an element /compound is(m),we get the following relationship. m = Mxn ² The mass of an (N) number of atoms of an element is(m), The relationship we get is m = MxN/NA ² The relationship we get when a mass(m) of an element/com pound contain(N) number of molecules is N = (m/M)xNA ² When (n) number of moles of an element/compound contain(N) number molecules the relationship is N = nxNA ² The relationship of mass of an atom /molecule(m0) is shown by m 0= M/NA. ² When it is required to get a specific quantity of matter and quantitative calculations in chemistry,the above relation ships are useful. (45 mts) Criteria for assessment and Evaluation ² Define the terms mole,Avogadro constant and molecular mass. ² Accepts that in chemistry when there is a need to quantify elements/compounds. ² Develop relationsship associated with quantitative of elements and compounds. ² Shows relationalships using equation. ² Investigates the accuracy of a relationaship.
  • 44.
    Annex 1.4.1 Data Table Element Mass of Relative Compound Mass of Relative a atom/g Atomic a compound Molecular Mass molecule/g Mass H 1.66 x 10 -24 1 H2O 2.99 x 10 -23 18 CH4 2.65 x 10 -23 16 C 1.99 x 10 -23 12 Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. NH3 2.82 x 10 -23 17 N 2.32 x 10 -23 14 CO 2 7.31 x 10 -23 44 O 2.66 x 10 -23 16 Annex 1.4.2 Instructions for group exploration ² Focus your attention to the type of matter given below assigned to your group. ² Element ² Compound ² Develop suitable expressions to quantify the matter assigned to you.It is possible to include Avogardo constant NA whereever suitable. ² m0 mass of an electron of element/ mass of a molecule of a compound whose molecular mass is M ² mass m of an element/compound contains n moles of atoms/molecules whose molecular mass is M ² mass m of an element/compound contains N number of atoms/molecules whose molecular mass is M ² In n moles of an element/ compound contained N atoms/ molecules whose molecular mass is M ² By making use of the relationships appropriately, select the problems and final solutions to the matter assigned to you. ² The molecular mass of carbon is 12gmol-1 .Find the number of moles in 10g of carbon. ² The releative atomic mass of oxygen is 16.Find the number of atoms in 10g of oxygen.
  • 45.
    ² The molecularmass of nitrogen is 14gmol-1.Find the mass of an atom of nitrogen. ² The molecular mass of hydrogen is 1g mol-1. Find the number of hydrogen atoms in 0.1 mol of hydrogen. ² The molecular mass of carbondioxide is 44gmol-1.Find the number of atoms in 20g of carbon dioxide. ² The relative molecular of Methane is 16gmol-1.Find the number of moles in 0.2g of methane. ² The molecular mass of water is 18g mol-1.Find the number of moles in 20g of water. ² Be prepared to present your findings to the class. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.
  • 46.
    Competency 2.0 ( Investigates Periodic patterns in properties of elements. Competency level 2.1 ( Investigates properties of elements change according to the atomic number. Activity 2.1 ( Let us investigate the changing patterns in properties of matter.. Time ( 120 minutes Quality inputs ( ² Four copies of instructions for exploration given in annex 2.1.1 ² Four copies of "Physical properties of matter" table given Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. in annex 2.1.2 ² Graph papers demy papers and pastel Teaching learning process ( Step 2.1.1 ( ² Display the class an enlarged figure of the diagram below. ) ² Get some of the student to complete the pattern given above. ² Conduct a discussion highlighting the following points• ² There is a pattern in the change in direction of the arrow. ² After a definite number of squares we come across an arrow which is directed in a similar direction. ² Patterns which occur again and agian at definite intervals are known as periodic pattern . ² Awareness of patterns simplify science education. (15 mts) I Step 2.1.2 ( ² Divide the class into three groups. ² Provide the groups with exploration instructions,table,graph papers,demy papers and pastel. ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration. ² Prepare them to present their findings to the class. (60 minutes) 45
  • 47.
    Step 2.1.3 ( ² Get each group to present their findings to the class. ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to elaborate on the presentation. ² Get the other groups to propose constructive sugges tions, ² Elaborate highlighting the following points. That, ² C and Si elements are at the top graph on of melting points ² He,Ne,Ar elements are at the bottom of the graph on melting points. ² According to the graph the variation in temperature of liquifactors shows a periodic pattern. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² Element C and Si are at the top of the graph boiling points. ² Elements He,Ne,Ar are at the bottom of the graph giving boiling points ² According to the graph the variation in boiling points shows a periodic pattern. ² Elements B and Al are at the top of the graph givining density . ² Elements H,N,Na and K are at the bottom of the graph giving density. ² According to the graph indicating variation in density shows a periodic pattern. ² The volume occupied by a molecular mass of an element when expressed in cubic centimetres it is called the atomic volume. ² In the graph giving the atomic volumes of elements,He,Na, and K elements are placed at the top. ² In the graph giving the atomic volumes of elements B and Al elements are placed at the bottom. ² According to the graph, variation in atomic volumes of elements shows a periodic pattern. ² Properties of elements is a periodic function of the atomic number. (45 mts) 46
  • 48.
    Criteria for assessmentand evaluation ² Explain the variation in pattern of temperature of liquifaction/boiling point/density/ atomic volume, of elements against the atomic number. ² Appreciates that there is a periodic variation shown by the atomic number against properties of elements. ² Draw graphs to show variation of properties of elements. ² Explatins a graph. ² Makes educational activities easy by understanding patterns. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Annex 2.1.1 Instructions for group exploration ² Your group is expected to investigate how one of the properties given below vary according to the Atomic number. ² Melting point of elements ² Boiling points of elements ² Density of elements ² Atomic volume of elements ² Using the table given draw a graph with Atomic number against the respective property. ² Enlarge the graph developed by you, and draw on a demy paper. ² Be prepared to present your findings to the whole class 47
  • 49.
    Annex 2.1.2 Physical Properties of Elements Density Atomic Elements Atomic Melting Boiling at 20 0C volume number point/ 0C point/0C g cm-3 cm3 mol-1 H 1 -259 -253 0.071 14.1 He 2 -270 -268.9 0.125 31.8 Li 3 180 1330 0.53 13.1 Be 4 1283 3000 11.84 4.9 B 5 2030 2550 2.34 4.3 C 6 3600 4800 2.25 5.4 N 7 -210 -196 0.81 17.3 O 8 -218 -183 1.14 14.0 F 9 -220 -188 1.15 17.1 Ne 10 -249 -245 1.20 16.8 Na 11 97.8 890 0.97 23.7 Mg 12 651 1100 1.74 14.0 Al 13 660 2500 2.70 10.0 Si 14 1410 2400 2.42 16.6 P 15 44 280 2.34 14.1 S 16 113 445 2.07 15.5 Cl 17 -103 -35 2.00 18.7 Ar 18 -189 -186 1.66 24.0 K 19 63 766 0.87 45.0 Ca 20 840 1500 1.55 26.0 (Source : Book of Data for Teachers of Chemistry / 1989, NIE) 48
  • 50.
    Competency 2.0 ( Investigates Periodic patterns in properties of elements. Competency level ( 2.2( Investigates the realtionship between the position in periodic table and the properties of elements. Activity 2.2 ( Let us return to the periodic table. Time ( 120 minutes Quality inputs ( ² Provide a large elaborate periodic table in annexe 2.2.1 ² Four copies of Instructions for exploration given in Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. annexe 2.2.2 ² Four copies of "Diversity in Physical and chemical properties" of elements in annexe 2.2.3 ² Graph papers demy papers and pastel Teaching learning process ( Step 2.2.1 ( ² Exhibit the periodic table to the class. ² Direct the students to observe the data indicated by symbols,numbers and colours. ² Conduct a discussion highlighting the following point. ²The elements are grouped in the periodic table for easy study of element. ²The transverse rows of the periodic table are called periods,they numbered as 1,2,3,4 etc.The vertical rows are called groups and they are numbered I,II,III,IV,V,VI,VII,VIII or O ²The elements are grouped in the periodic table as periods and groups ,according to a foundation based on argument. (15 mts) Step 2.2.2 ( ² Divide the class into three groups. ² Provide the groups with instructions for exploration graph papers,demy papers and pastel. ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration. ² Prepare them to present their findings to the whole class. (60 minutes) 49
  • 51.
    Step 2.2.3 ( ² Get each group to present their findings to the class. ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to elaborate on the presentation. ² Get the other groups to propose constructive sugges tions, ² Elaborate highlighting the following points. That, ² The number of electrons in the outermost shell of an atom of the element is equal to the number of the group to which the element belongs. ² The number of shells containing electrons is equal to the number of the period to which the element belongs. ² Most elements to the left hand side of the periodic table are found in the solid state. ² The elements at the top on the right hand side of the periodic table are in the gaseous state. ² The elements in the left hand side of the periodic table are mostly metals and when you go forward along a period non metals are found. ² When you move down along a group containing metals there are elements which show strong metallic properties. ² The density of elements from groups I to IV in 2 and 3 periods,increase regularly ,but from V to O it decrease regularly. ² When we move forward along 2 and 3 periods,the atomic volume decrease up to group III,gradually increase thereafter. ² When we move forward along 2 and 3 periods,from group I to IV the melting point and the boiling point increase where as groups V,VI,VII and O the elements have very low melting point and boiling points. ² When we move forward along a period,the oxides,chlorids and hydrides changes from ionic to covalent types. (45 mts) 50
  • 52.
    Criteria for assessmentand evaluation ² Explain varying patterns of properties of elements when moving forwards along periods and down along groups. ² Appreciate that the elements are classified in the periodic table for easy study of properties of elements. ² Discovers connection between the position of element in the periodic table and the proper ties of the element. ² Understands natural patterns. ² Use graphs to present data meaningfully when it is suitable. 51
  • 53.
    Copyright © 2007National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. . 52 Periodic Table Annex 2.2.1
  • 54.
    Annexe2.2.2 Instructions for group exploration ² Your group is assigned to study the relationship between the place in the periodic table and its properties in one of the following. ² moving forward along the second period ² moving forward along the third period ² moving down along groups I,II,III,IV ² moving down along groups V,VI,VII,O ² By using the periodic table and the table privided understand the patterns in the following. ² Number of electrons in the outer most shell ² Metallic,non metallic,physical state Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² Density ² Atomic volume ² Melting point/Boiling point ² Acidicity-Basicity of oxides/Hydrides ²Be prepared to present your findings to the class using graphs whenever required. 53
  • 55.
    Annex 2.2.3 Diversity of Chemical and Physical Properties of elements Atomic Electronic Metalic/ Nature of Density Volume melting Boiling Elements Atomic Non Number Config. Oxide cm-3 point 0C point0C Metalic gcm-3 mol H 1 1 0.071 14.1 -259 -253 He 2 2 0.125 31.8 -270 -268.9 Li 3 2, 1 0.53 13.1 180 1330 Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Be 4 2, 2 11.84 4.9 1283 3000 B 5 2, 3 2.34 4.3 2030 2550 C 6 2, 4 2.25 5.4 3600 4800 N 7 2, 5 0.81 17.3 -210 -196 O 8 2, 6 1.14 14.0 -218 -183 F 9 2, 7 1.15 17.1 -220 -188 Ne 10 2, 8 1.20 16.8 -249 -245 Na 11 2, 8, 1 0.97 23.7 97.8 890 Mg 12 2, 8, 2 1.74 14.0 651 1100 Al 13 2, 8, 3 2.70 10.0 660 2500 Si 14 2, 8, 4 2.42 16.6 1410 2400 P 15 2, 8, 5 2.34 14.1 44 280 S 16 2, 8, 6 2.07 15.5 113 445 Cl 17 2, 8, 7 2.00 18.7 -103 -35 Ar 18 2, 8, 8 1.66 24.0 -189 -186 K 19 2, 8, 8, 1 0.87 45.0 63 766 Ca 20 2, 8, 8, 2 1.55 26.0 840 1500 Ga 31 2, 8, 18, 3 5.90 11.8 30 2237 Ge 32 2, 8, 18, 4 5.46 13.3 937 2837 As 33 2, 8, 18, 5 5.72 13.1 613 sublimation Se 34 2, 8, 18, 6 4.80 16.5 220 685 Br 35 2, 8, 18, 7 3.12 25.6 -7.2 58.5 Kr 36 2, 8, 18, 8 3.00 32.3 -157 -153 54
  • 56.
    Competency 3.0 ( Use chemical reactions appropriatily to fulfil requirments in life. Competency level 3.1 Classify chemical recations Activity 3.1 ( Let us understand about types of reactions. . Time ( 120 minutes Quality inputs ( ² !0 cm3 of concentrated nitric acid ² A copper wire of 30 cm length,half of which is made into a coil Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² Boiling tube ² Four work station prepared according to instructions given in annex 3.1.1 ² Four copies of instructions for group exploration given in annexe 3.1.2 ² Demy paper and pastel Teaching learning process ( Step 3.1.1 . ( ² Introduce the coiled end of the copper wire into the boiling tube containing concentrated HNO3and display to the class. ² Direct the students to observe what happens ² Conduct a discussion highlighting the following points. ² When conc HNO3 reacts with Cu metal given coloured Cu(NO3)2 solution is formed and reddish brown coloured NO2is given out. 55
  • 57.
    ² During chemicalreactions ,simple substances are converted to complex substances or complex substances are converted to simple substances. ² The chemical reactions could be grouped according to the nature of the reaction. (15 mts.) Step 3.1.2 ( ² Divide the class into four groups. ² Provide the groups with instructions for exploration graph papers,demy papers and pastel. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration. ² Prepare them to present their findings to the whole class. (60 minutes) Step 3.1.3 ( ² Get each group to present their findings to the class. ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to elaborate on the presentation. ² Get the other groups to propose constructive sugges tions, ² Elaborate highlighting the following points. That, ² Elements Iron and sulphur combine to form sulphide. ² Magnesium and oxygen combine to form magnesium oxide. ² When a different compound is formed when an ele ment-element,or element-compound or compound- compound combine is known as a combination reaction. ² When potassium permanganate is heated it dissociates into simple compounds. ² When hydrogen peroxide is heated it dissociates into simple compounds. ² When a compound dissociates into simple compounds or to elements and simple compounds,it is called a dissociation reaction. ² Metal magnesium,reacts with copper sulphate releasing Cu metal forming Magnesium sulphate. ² Zinc metal reacts with dilute sulphuric acid liberating H2 gas and form zinc sulphate. 56
  • 58.
    ² When anelement displace another element in a compound and takes its place and form another compound it is called single replacement reaction. ² When calcium chloride react with sodium carbonate calcium carbonate and sodium chloride is formed. ² When ferrous sulphate reacts with sodium hydroxide ,ferrous hydroxide and sodium sulphate is formed. ² When an element or a radical of a compound,reacts with an element or a radical of another compound undergo an exchange reaction it is known as a doubel replacement reaction. (60 mts) Criteria for assessment and evaluation ² Classify chemical reaction and describe using examples. ² Apperciates that chemical changes during a reaction can be made use of to classify chemical change. ² Demonstrate chemical reaction. ² Data given using symbols are made use of gainfully. ² Demonstrate skills in using equipment. Annexe3.1.1 Instructions to set up work stations Set up four work stations by keeping the following materials.label materials and equipments. Work station 01 ² Iron filings 3.5 g ² Sulphur powder 1.5g ² Boiling tubes 01 ² Holders 01 ² Sprit lamp 01 ² Piece of Magnesium ribbon 01 Work station 02 ² KMnO4 4g ² H2O2 solution 20 cm3 ² Boiling tubes 02 ² Holders 01 ² Spirit lamp 01 ² Dry ekle pieces 02 57
  • 59.
    Work station 03 ² 2 cm length of clean magnesium ribbon ² Solution of Cuso4(2g of Cuso4 in 100cm3 of water) ² Zinc pieces 1g ² Dilute H2SO4 acid 10 cm3 ² Two test tubes ² Test tube rack Work station 04 ² CaCl2 solution (CaCl2 0.5g in 10 cm3 of water) ² Na2CO3 solution (Na2CO3 0.5g in 10 cm3 of water) ² FeSO4 solution(FeSO4 0.5g in 10 cm3 of water) Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² NaOH solution (NaOH 0.5g in 10 cm3 of water) ² Four test tubes ² Test tube rack Instructions for group exploration ² Concentrate your attention on the two reactions assigned to your group. ² Heating iron filings with sulphur/burn magnesium in air ² Heating of Potassium permanganate/Heating of Hydrogen peroxide ² Reaction between magnesium and Copper sulphate/Reaction between zinc and dilute sulphuric acid ² Reaction between Calcium Chloride and Sodium Carbonate/Reaction between ferrous sulphate and Sodium hydroxide ² Familiarize yourself with the materials kept at the respective work station. ² Conduct the reaction and record your observations. ² Write down the equations for the chemical reactions. ² Using prefered symbols,develop a common equation to represent both reactions. ² Be prepared to present your findings to the class. 58
  • 60.
    Competency 3.0 :Use chemical reactions appropriatily to fulfil requirments in life. Competency level 3.2 : Investigates interaction between matter and electricity Activity 3.2 : Let us find out connection betwen matter and electricity . Time : 120 minutes Quality inputs : • copper and zink sheet of 2 cm x 5 cm size. • Fruit (Lime,Orange,Apple) or potatoe yam • LED bulb • Three copies of instructions group exploration given in Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. annex 3.2.1 • Common table prepaired according to instructions in annex 3.2.2 • Demy paper and pastel Teaching learning process : • Insert the zink and copper sheets into the fruit (Lime,Orenge,Apple) or potato yam, so that they are close together but not touching. Connect the LED bulb amd demostrate its' glow. • Conduct a discussion highlighting the following. • That electricity is produced when subtances in the fruit/potato yam interacts with the metals. • There is an inter connection between matter and electricity (15 mts.) Step 3.2.1 • Divide the class into three groups. • Provide the groups with instructions for exploration, demy paper and pastels. • assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration. • Prepare them to present their findings to the whole class (60 mts.) Step 3.2.2 : • Get the group to present their findings to the class. • Give the first opportunity for elaboration to the respec tive group which made the presentation. • Get the other groups to propose constructive suggestions 59
  • 61.
    • Elaborate highlightingthe following points. • The following observations were noted when Copper (II) Chloride solution was electrolyse. • Copper was deposited on the electrode connected to the negative terminal of the battery. Cu2+ (aq) + 2e Cu(s) • Chlorine gas was liberated at the electrode connected to the positive terminal of the battery. 2Cl - (aq) + 2e Cl2 (g) + 2e • When a moist litmus paper was exposed to Chlorine gas it decolourised. • The green colour of the solution grsduslly redused. • temperature of the system increased. ( 45 mts) ) • With lighting of the bulb, flow of current through the electrolyte was confirmed. • It is possible to change matter by supplying electricity from outside. • Effecting a chemical change at the electrodes by passing a current through an ionic solution (electrolyte) is known as electrolysis. • During electroplating of the iron plate the following observa tions were made. • Copper was deposited as a thin film on the iron plate. Cu2+ (aq) + 2e Cu(s) • Copper plate gradually dissolved. Cu(s) Cu2+ (aq) + 2e • Colour of the solution did not change • Level of the solution increased. • The depositing of a metal on a surface is known as Electroplat- ing. • By electroplating a surface gets a metallic finish and protection. • When bulb is connected between Copper and Zink plates immersed in dilute sulphuric acid, • The bulb ignited. • Zink plate gradually dissolved. • Gas bubbles got collected on the Copper plate. • When bulb is connected between Copper and Zink plates immersed in dilute sulphuric acid, an electric current is pro- duced • A set up where an electric current is produced, associated with a chemical change is known as an electric cell. • Electric currrent could be obtained from dry cells and batteries. 60
  • 62.
    • Removal ofelectrons from an atom, an ion or a radical is Oxcidation. • Intake of electron from an atom, an ion or a radical is Reduction. • Electrode where Oxidation is taking place is known as Anode. • Electrode where reduction is taken place is known as Cathode. (45 mts) Criteria for assesment and evaluation • Explain about electric cells, electrolysis and electroplating. • Appreciates that it is possible to enhance daily living using the relationship between matter and electricity. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. • Investigates the relationship between matter and electricity. • Prepair a diagram with a set up selecting the materials. • Use demostration effectively for communication. Instruction for group exploration • Your group is assigned to study the interaction between matter and electricity using one of the following. • Chemical cells. • Electrolysis • Electroplating • Study the diagram in the respective precincts , select the necessary materials to prepare the set up from the commen table. • Make the setup. • .Observe the following and report on the set up relevant to you • Changes that take place at the electrodes. • Changes in the solution. • Is there a change in temperature during the reaction? • Did the bulb ignit? • What are the possible ions in the solution provide to you? • Be prepared to present your findings to the class along with a demostration. 61
  • 63.
    Annex 3.2.2 Keeping diagrams in the work stations Work Station 1 4V _ + Bulb + _ Carbon Electrodes CuCl2 Aqeous Solution Eletrolysis Work Station 2 4V _ + Bulb + _ Cu Electrode Fe Electrode CuSO4Aqeous Solution Electroplateing Work Station 3 Bulb Zn Electrode Cu Electrode Dil. H2SO4 Solution Chemical Cell 62
  • 64.
    Annex 3.2.3 Materials and apperatus on common table • Carbon Electrodes 02 • Copper electrodes 02 • Zinc electrodes 01 • 2 cm x 5 cm Iron plate (surface cleaned ) • Dry Cells 06 • 1.5 V Bulbs 03 • Thermometers 03 • 100 cm3 Beaker 03 • 0.5 mol dm-3 CuCl2 aqeous solution 100 cm3 Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. • 0.1 mol dm-3 Dil. H2SO4 Solution 100 cm3 -3 • 0.1 mol dm CuSO4 Solution 100 cm3 • Litmus papers • Connecting wires α α ±± . 63
  • 65.
    Competency 3.0 ( Use chemical changes suitably to fulfil necessities in life Competency level 3.3 ( Investigates reaction patterns of pure metals. Activity 3.3 ( Let us explore the reactivity of metals. Time ( 120 minutes Quality inputs ( ² Piece of Sodium metal,knife and a basin of water ² Four work stations prepared according to instrutions given in annex 3.3.1 Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² Four copies of instructions for group exploration given in annex 3.3.2 ² Demy papers and pastel Teaching learning process ( Step 3.3.1 ( ² Direct the students to observe how a cut surface a freshly cut piece of sodium change with time. ² Demonstrate to the class the reaction between sodium and water by putting a piece of sodium into a basin of water. ² Conduct a discussion highlighting the following points. ² Sodium is a pure metal. ² When a freshly cut surface of sodium metal is exposed to air for a short time it looses its shine. ² Sodium metal reacted vigorously with cold water. ² It is possible for the reactivity metals could differ from metal to metal. (15 mts) Step 3.3.2 ( ² Divide the class into four groups. ² Provide the groups with exploration instructions,table,demy papers and pastel. ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration. ² Prepare them to present their findings to the class. (60 mts) Step 3.3.3 ( ² Get each group to present their findings to the class. ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to elaborate on the presentation.
  • 66.
    ² Get theother groups to propose constructive sugges tions, ² Elaborate highlighting the following points. ² When Mg,Al,Zn,Fe and Cu metals are kept in the air for a short time there is no observable change. ² When Mg is heated it burns with a glowing flame. ² When Al, Zn, Fe and Cu are heated in air they loose their shine. ² When Mg, Al,Zn,Fe, and Cu are heated in air it re acts with the oxygen in the air and forms the oxide of he metal. Eg: 2Mg(s)+O2(g) → 2MgO(s) Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² Mg metals reacts very slowly with cold water releas ing gas bubbles. ² Al,Zn,Fe and Cu do not show any observable reaction with cold water ,in a short time. ² Mg reacts some what vigorously with hot water releasing gas bubbles. ² Al and Zn reacts very slowly with hot water releasing gas bubbles. ² Fe and Cu does not show any visible reaction with hot water,in a short time. ² When Mg,Al and Zn reacts with water,hydrogen gas is released forming the hydroxide of the metal. Eg Mg(s)+2H2O(l) → Mg(OH)2(aq)+H2(g) ² Mg,Al,Zn and Fe reacts with dilute acids releasing gas bubbles. Eg Mg(s)+2HCl(aq) → MgCl2(aq)+H2(g) ² Cu does not react with dilute acids. ² Due high reactivity of Na ,it is dangerous to heat the metal in air or react it with acids/Hot water. ² A metal whose reactivity is high could displace a metal whose reactivity is less from an aqueous solution of it. Eg: Fe(s)+Cu2+(aq) → Fe2+(aq)+Cu(s) ² It is possible to arrange the metals in their order of reactivity in a series. Cu<Fe<Zn<Al<Mg<Na ² The metal series arranged acorrding to decreas ing reacrivity, is known as the activity series ² Scientists have develope the activiry series , by including metals explore and in addition the other metals as follows
  • 67.
    . ² The metal series arranged according to decreasing reactivity,is known as the activity series. ² Scientists have developed the activity series, by including metals explored and in addition the other metals as follows. K Na Ca Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Na Mg Mg Al Zn Al Zn Fe Sn Fe Cu Pb Au Cu Hg Exploring metal Ag Pt Au Introduced Build up activity metal series ² Activity series is useful when studying about metals.
  • 68.
    Criteria for assessmentand evaluation ² Explanes how the activity of two metals could be compaired ² Accepts that sequential arrangement of metals in the series developed, and the activity series in agrement. ² Compair the activity of two matals experimentaly. ² Come to conclutions basing observations ² Able to observe the effect of a factor by controlling the variables. Annex 3.3.1 Instructions for setting up of work stations Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² Set up four work stations for activities. ² Provide the four work stations with the following materials. ² Boiling tube ² Two test tubes ² Test tube stand ² Test tube holder ² Bunsen burner ² Pieces of sandpaper ² Small Scissor ² Cold water and hot water ² Two test tube containing 10 cm3 of CuSO4 solution ² Provide the work stations with one of the following ² Six pieces each of Mg and Al ² Six pieces each of Al and Zn ² Six pieces each of Zn and Fe ² Six pieces each of Fe and Cu (Each of these metals must be of the same size as a 2 cm length of Mg)
  • 69.
    Instructions for groupexploration ² For exploration you are provided with one of the following metal groups. ² Mg-Al ² Al-Zn ² Zn-Fe ² Fe-Cu ² Observe the reactivity of the metals seperately with the follwing (cut the metal into small pieces when required) ² Air Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² Cold water ² Hot water ²Dilute Hydrochloric acid ²CuSO4 Solution ² From your observations compare the reactivity of the two metals. ² Develop with a discussion a series in the ascending order of reactivity of the two metals provided,along with sodium and gold. ² Be prepared to present your findings to the class.
  • 70.
    Competency 3.0 ( Use chemical changes suitably to fulfil necessities in life Competency level 3.4 ( Use suitable methods for extraction of metals Activity 3.4 ( Let us find about methods for extraction of metals. Time ( 120 minutes Quality inputs ( ² Piece of Lead,Lead monoxide,blow pipe,charcoal block and bunsen burner. ² Two copies of instructions for group exploration given in annex 3.4.1 Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² Two copies of article on "extraction of metals" in annex 3.4.2 ² Demy papers and pastel Teaching learning process ( Step 3.4.1 ( ² Show the class a piece and lead monoxide ² Ask from the student about the possibility of turning lead oxide to lead. ² Put some lead monoxide into a hole in the piece of charcoal block,and direct the bunsen flame to the hole by blowing through the blow pipe. ² Allow students to observe the change. ² Lead a discussion high lighting the follwing points. ² Lead is formed by the dissociation of lead monoxide by heat. ² During extraction of some metals thermal methods are used. ² Other methods too are used for extraction of metals ² When selecting a suitable method for extraction it is important to consider the form in which it is available in nature and the chemical activity of the metal (15 mts). 69
  • 71.
    Step 3.4.2 ( ² Divide the class into two groups. ² Provide the groups with the article on instructions for exploration ,demy papers and pastel ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration. ² Prepare them to present their findings to the class. (60 mts) Step 3.4.3 ( ² Get each group to present their findings to the class. ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to elaborate on the presentation. ² Get the other groups to propose constructive sugges tions, Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² Summrize highlighting the following points. ² The following points are agreeable for metals at the top of the activity series. ² Reaction is very high ² Because they react fast with air and water they are kept either immersed in paraffin oil or imeared with a protective covering. ² They are available in nature as chloride of the metal. ² The metal is extracted mainly electrolysing the fused metal chloride. ² The following points are valid for metals at the middle of the activity series. ² Shows medium range of reactivity. ² Mainly available in nature ,as oxide of the metal ² Carbonate of the metal or Sulphide of the metal. ² Metal is extracted by thermal dissociation of oxides,Sulphides or Carbonates. ² The following points are valid for metals at the bottom of the activity series. ² Reactivity is very low. ² Available in nature as pure metals,not as com pounds. ² Extraction is by separating the metal from the soil particles by physical means. (45 mts) 70
  • 72.
    Annex 3.4.1 Criteria for assessment and evâlution ² Explain the basic methods of extraction of metals. ² Appreciates that there is a connection between the reactivity of the metal,from in which it is available in nature ,and method of extraction ² Correlate the place occupied by a certain metal in the activity series and its properties. ² Gather facts by using reacting materials. ² Present the facts collected in a way understood by the others. Annex 3.4.1 Instructions for Group exploration ² You are expected to make a study of a metal group belonging to the activity series given Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. below. K Na ² Metals with high reactivity Ca Mg Al Zn Fe ² Metals with middle rate Sn of reactivity Pb Cu Hg ² Metals with low reactivity Ag Pt Au ² Using the artical supplied to you,gather data according to the headings given below,about the metal group assigned to you ² Availability in nature ² Method of extraction ² How it is stored ² Gather data about the metal gold under the headings given above,and compare with metals assigned to you. ² Be prepared to present your findings to the class. 71
  • 73.
    Annex 3.4.2 Metal extraction Ores in which the metal with present as the metal chloride Main constituents The metal extracted Ore in the Ore Sodium Chloride NaCl Sodium Potassium Chloride KCl Potassium Magnesium Chloride MgCl2 Magnisium Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Calcium Chloride CaCl2 Calcium Ores in which the metal is present metal oxide Much constituents Types of Ore The metal extractor in the Ore Haematite Fe2O3 Iron Magnatite Fe3O4 Iron Limonite Fe2O.2H2O Iron Boxite Al2O3.2H2O Aluminium Cuprite Cu2O3 Copper Tinstons SnO2 Tin Ores in which the metalis present as the metal carbonate Main constitutent Types of Ore The metal extractor in the Ore Callamine ZnCO3 Zinc Limestone CaCO3 Calcium Malkite CuCO3.Cu(OH)2 Copper Aturaite 2CuCO3.Cu(OH)2 Copper Magnasite MgCO3 Magnisium 72
  • 74.
    Ores in whichthe metal is present as metal sulphide Types of Ore Main constituents Metal extractor in the Ore Copper Pyrites CuFeS2 Copper Zincblent ZnS Zinc Galena PbS Lead Zinabar HgS Mercury Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Methods of Extraction Electrolysis of Fused compound The compound that is electrolysed to extract the metal and Metal the chemical reaction that take place Available in nature as Sodium Chloride. In the Downs process Sodium Chloride id fused and electrolysed. For it to liquify easily it is mixed with Calcium Chloride. → NaCl → Na+ + Cl- → Sodium CaCl2 → Ca2+ + 2Cl- ² At the anode Cl2 if formed. ² At the cathode Na metal is formed. (the diagrames mention under Sodium extraction) Available in nature as KCl. The metal is obtained by Potassium electrolysing the fused Chloride. Available as CaCO3 in nature. By adding Hydrochloric acid to this, CaCl2 is formed. Fused CaCl2 is electrolysed in Graphaite crucible. Calcium ² Metallic Calcium is deposited on the cathode. ² Chlorine is evolved at the Anode. 73
  • 75.
    The compound thatis electrolysed to extracts the metal Metal and chemical reactions take place Magnesium Chloride is present in nature as Carnalite in sold deposites; Magnesium Fused Carnalite is electrolysed in Iron vessels. Here mostly MgCl2 undergo electrolysis. Aluminiumis present naturally as Boxite. (Al2O3.2H2O) This is purified Aluminium and fused , then it is desolve in purified and fused Cryolite (3NaF.AlF3) It is electrolysed. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. 2. Reduction of the Ore with Carbon or Carbon Monoxide Metal Reactions and the way reduction is performed Th Ore Hematite (Fe2O3) is roasted , and the oxide is obtained without any vapourising material, These oxide is heated in a blast furnance Iron reduced by Carbon monoxide. Fe2O3 + 3CO → 2Fe + 3CO2 (The diagram is mention under Iron extraction) Zinc blend (ZnS) or Calomine (ZnCO3) is roasted in air convert to the oxide Zinc 2ZnS + 3O2 → 2ZnO + 2 SO2 this oxide is mixed with Coke powder and reduced. ZnO + C Zn + CO The Tinstone (SnO2) Ore is roasted in air and later toasted with Tin Carbon. SnO2 + 2C Sn + 2CO Galena (PbS) first converted to Leadoxide. 2PbS + 3O2 2PbO + 2SO2 Lead Later , Lead is obtained as in the reaction given below. PbO + C Pb + CO PbO + CO Pb + CO2 74
  • 76.
    Extraction of Sodium Sodium is extrcted by Electrolysing fused Sodium chloride. To reduced the melting point of Sodium Chloride to 600 0C, it is mixed with CaCl2. The fused solution is electrolysed by using the Down's cell. Chlorine gas Fused Sodium metal Fused Sodium metal Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Cylindrical steel cathode Steel diaphragm to Fused Sodium Chlo- avoide the reaction of ride and Calcium Sodium and Chlorine. Chloride mixture. Carbon (Graphite) anode Down's cell The cathode is made of steel and the anode is of Graphite. During electrolysis the following reactions take place at the electrodes. At cathode Na+ + e Na At anode 2Cl- Cl2 + 2e 75
  • 77.
    Iron Extraction The Ore that is frequently used is hematite which contains Iron (111) Moisture,Sulphur.Arsenic are present in the ore as impurities.To remove these the ore is roasted in air.Hematite is then mixed coke. Coke is a type of coal which produced more heat. For this the Ore is mixed with Limestone. The heat required is supplied by coke. Limestones remove sand in the Iron. This reaction taken place in a blast furnace. Iron Ore, Coke and Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Limestones gas impurities gas impurities Hot air in Hot air in Liquid Iron out Blast Furnace The diagram given above show a blast furnace. The mixture is introduced to the furnace at the top. The temperature in this furnace is more than 1500 0C. The chemical reaction taking place could be shown step by step as shown below. 1. The Oxygen in the air that enter the furnace with coke react to form Carbon dioxide. C + O2 CO2 2. This CO2 reacts further with Coke and forms CO gas. CO2 + C 2 CO 3. The CO gas reacts with Iron (III) Oxide and form Iron. Fe2O3 + 3CO 2Fe + 3CO2 4. In addition to CO Carbon too reacts with Iron Oxide to form Iron. Fe2O3 + 3C 2Fe + 3CO 76
  • 78.
    Extraction of Gold Metals Gold, Platinum, Silver and Mercury usually do not react with other elements chemically to form compounds. These metals are called inactive metals and they are found in nature as the elements. But it is mixed with gravel, sand and other soil particals. The has to be seperated from the impurities. Gold could be obtained from Quart Ore, river sand or gravel as small peices. Here the most simple mathode to extract the Gold is to sieve the river sand and gravel. Seeving is a process where gravitational mathodes dependent on dencity. During seeving heavy gold metal gets collected at the bottom of the vessel and the gravel and sand gets washed out by the mining wates. Directing the water spout at the gold containes and gold could be extracted. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Another mathod is quarts is powdred and mixed with water , is passed over amalgamated cop- per electrodes. In this process gold is dissolved at the surface of the plate. Later the Mercury is bistilled. A piece of rock which contains gold 77
  • 79.
    Competency 3.0 : Use chemical change suitable to fulfil necessity of life Competency Level 3.5 : Control the rate of chemical reaction Activity 3.5 : Let us investigate about the factors affecting the rate of chemical reaction. Time : 210 mts. Quality Inputs : • Spakle, Sandalwood stic and a box of matches • Four copies of the two page artical on instructions for Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. exploration given in annex 3.5.1 • Four work station arranged according to instrution given in annex 3.5.2 • Demy papers and pastels Teaching Learning Process Step 3.5.1 • Ignit the Sparkle, Sandalwood stic at the same time and direct the students to observe. • Discuss about the students observations. • Lead a discussion highlighting the following points. • When Sparkle and Sandalwood stic were ignited the chemicals present in them burn. • The rate of burning of Spakle is greater than the rate of burning of Sandalwood stic. • There are different factors which could affect the rate of a reaction. • The rate of a chemical reaction could be decided by the time taken to decrease a certain quantity of reactants or the production of a certain quantity of the product. (15 mts.) Step 3.5.2 : • Divide the class into four groups. • Provide the group with instrutions for exploration, demy pastels. • Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration. • Prepare them to present their findings to the class. (60 mts. )
  • 80.
    Step 3.5.3 : • get each group to present their findings to the class. • Give the first opportunity to the respective groups to elaborate on the presentation. • get the other groups to propose contructive suggestions. • Summerize highlighting the following points. • In the experiment it is necessary to keep the factors constant other than the factor which we are experiment- ing • In a reactionwhere a gaseous product is obtained to determine the rate of reaction the volume of gas liber- ated at a definite time interval or the time taken to liberate equal volums of the gas could be measured. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. • In the reaction between Magnesium and Acid euqal weights of cleaned pieces of Magnesium ribbon must be used. • When the effect of temperature is determined, equal sizes of clean iron nails, equal volums of KMnO4, H2SO4 acidmust be used and the time taken for the violet colour to disappear must be compaired. • When acids are used , precautionary measures for safty must be taken. • When considering the effect of temperature the differ- ence in the temperatures of the solutions must be about 150 C . • When Calcium Carbonate (Marble Chips) are used, powder or crystals of equal weight must be taken. • For the Hydrogen peroxide dissociation reaction a recent production of Hydrogen Peroxide must be used. • In the experiment to find the effect of concentration on rate of reaction the set up given below could be used. Mg ribbon Glass Tube 987654321 987654321 987654321 Rubber 987654321 987654321 987654321 987654321 987654321 987654321 987654321 987654321 H2 Bung 987654321 HCl 987654321 987654321 987654321 987654321 987654321 987654321 (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
  • 81.
    • In theexperiment to determine the effect of temperature on rate of reaction the experiment to be set up as given below Cleaned Iron nail KMnO4 $H2SO4 Solution (i) (ii) Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. 0 At room temperature At 60 C temperature • In the experiment to determine the effect of physical nature of the reactants the experiment could be set up as given below. HCl CO2 CaCO3 • In the experiment to determine the effect of catalysts the experiment could be set up as given below O2 Syringe H2O2 MnO2 or Sand (45 mts.)
  • 82.
    Step 3.5.4 : • Set up earlier groups and direct them to work stations • Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration. • Prepare them to present their findings to the whole class. (45 mts.) Step 3.5.5 : • Get groups to present their findings to the class. • Give the first opportunity for elaboration to respective groupwhich made the presentation • Get other groups to propose contructive suggestions. • summerize highlighting the following points. • When Mg reacts with HCl with different concentrations, the time taken to liberate a constant volume of gas de Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. creased with tthe increase in concentration. • concentration affects the rate of reaction. • when Fe reacts with Acidic KMnO4of same concentration, with increase in temperature the time taken for the violet colour in the solution to disappear was less. • Temperarure affects the rate of reaction. • The time taken for a definit volume of CO2 to liberate when powdered CaCo3 is less than when the CaCo3 is in the cryslline form. • Physical nature of the reactants affect the rate of reaction. • When MnO2 is used, the dissociation of H2O2 increases. • MnO2 acts as a catalyst during dissociation of H2O2 • Catalyst affects the rate of reaction. • A catalyst is a constituent itself undergoing a chemical change or a decrease in weight. • When gases reacts if there is an increase of presure the frequency of gas molecules colliding increase and as a result the rate of reaction increase. • It is possoble to control the rate of a reaction as required by controlling concentration, temperarure, physical nature, catalysts and pressure. • Controlling the rate of chemical reactions it is possible to increase the productivity and efficieancy in day to activities of chemical production. (45 mts.) Criteria for assesment and evaluation • Name and explane the factors affecting the rate of a reaction. • Accepts the fact that by controlling the factors affecting the rate of a reaction, the reaction rate could be kept at an optimum level.
  • 83.
    • Set upexperiments and test the factors affecting the rate of chemical changes. • Conducts activities according to a plan. • Develope self creations by considering the opinions of others. Annex 3.5.1 Instructions for group explorations - handout 1 • Your group is assigned to find the effect of the following factors on the rate of a chemical reaction. • Concentration • Temperature • Physical state • catalyst • Device an experiment to find the effect of the factor using the instrutions and other materials provides in the work station. • Be prepaired to present your plan to the class Instructions for group explorations - handout 2 • Focus your attention to any proposed changes to the plan you submitted. • Set up apperatus according to plan and carry out experiment. • Report your observations. • Get ready to present your findings to class. Annex 3.5.2 Instrutions to set up work stations Work station I - Concentration • 3 pieces of Mg ribbon ( 3 cm ) • Sand papers • 3 Boiling tubes • Glass tubing ( about 10 cm) • Rubber stopper • HCl solution of 2 mol dm -3, 1 mol dm-3, 0.5 mol dm-3 concentrations • Stop watch Work station II - Temperature • 2 Fe nails • KMnO4 solution ( 0.1 mol dm-3) • H2SO4 acid solution (1 mol dm-3) • Water trough containing hot water. • Two boiling tubes. • Measuring cylinder. • Sand paper • Thermometer • Stop watch
  • 84.
    Work station III- Physical nature • Equal weight of Calcium Carbonate crystals and powder. • Dilute HCl solution • Conical flask • Delivery tube • Rubber stopper • Thistle Funnel • Measuring cylinder • Water trough • Beehive shelf • Stop watch Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Work station IV - Catalyst • Conical flask • Delivery tube • Hydrogen Peroxide solution • Manganese dioxide/ Sand • Syringe ( glass) • Measuring cylinder • Rubber stopper
  • 85.
    Competency 3.0 : Use chemical changes suitable to fulfil necessities of life Competency level 3.6 : Take steps to prevent metal corrosion Activity 3.6 : Let us find ways to conserve metal by minimizing corrosion. Time : 120 mts. Quality inputs : • Potassium fericyanide and Phenolpthalein • Small quantity of freshly prepared FeSO4 and NaOH • 3 copies of artical on instructions for exploration in annex Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. 3.6.1 • 3 work stations arranged according to instructions in annex 3.6.2 • Demy paper and pastel Teaching learning process : • Inquire about their precious knowledge on rusting of iron. • Add to the freshly prepared FeSO4 solution a few drop of potassium ferricyanide and a few drop of phenolpthalien to NaOH solution and show the students. • Lead a discussion highlighting the following points. • Rusting is due to water and Oxygen reacting with Iron • Acids and salts increase rusting where as bases retard rusting. • Initial reactions during rusting could be given as follows. Fs(s) Fe2+(aq) + 2e (Oxidation) 2H2O(l) + O2(g) + 4e 4OH-(aq) (reduction) • When Potassium fericyanide is added to a solution of Fe2+ solution there is a deep blue colours. • Potassium ferricyanide could be used as an indicator to detect Fe2+ ions in a medium. • When Phenolphthalein is added to a solution containing (OH)- there is a pink colour. • Phenolphthalein could be used as an indicator to detect (OH)- ions in a medium. (15 mts.) Step 3.6.2 : • Divide the class into four groups. • Provide the groups with instrutiions for exploration, demy papers and pastels. • Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration. • Prepare them to present their findings to the whole class (60 mts)
  • 86.
    Step 3.6.3 : • Get the group to present their findings to the class. • Give the first oppotunity for elaboration to the respective group which made the presentation • Get the other groups to propose constructive suggestions. • Summerize highlighting the following points. • Where the medium turned blue, Iron corrode and forms Fe++ • Where the medium turned pink, OH- are formed. Pink Pink Mg 654321 654321 654321 Zn 7654321 7654321 7654321 Cu 7654321 7654321 Pb 7654321 7654321 654321 7654321 7654321 7654321 7654321 7654321 7654321 7654321 7654321 Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Pink Blue • Where the Iron is in contact with metals above Iron the following occur • Iron does not corrode. • The matal which has the higher reactivity acts as the anode and undergo corrosion due to Oxidation. • Iron acts as the cathode. • At the iron nail which acts as the cathode there is a pink colour due to the production of (OH)- iron. • These areas are called ‘cathode areas’ • When the metal which has a higher reactivity acts as the anode and sacrifies itself and prevents iron from rusting, it is called cathode protection. eg. applying zink on iron surface. (galvanizing) • When any two metals in the activity series are in contact with one another, the metal which has a higher reactivity corrode protecting the meatal of lower of reactivity metal which corrodes is called the sacrificing metal. • When metals which are below iron in the activity series are in contact with iron the following take place. • Iron corrodes vigorously. • Iron acts as the anode and forms Fe2+ by oxidation. • The blue coloured area near iron nail, which acts as the anode is called the anode area. • When a metal is coated to prevent it from coming in contact with factors which are necessary for corrosion, and preventing iron from becoming the anode, it is called anose protection. eg. coating Iron surface with Sn, paint, grease.
  • 87.
    • It ispossible to keep the ions formed at the cathode and the anode by using a jelly medium instead of a liquid medium in the places where they are formed in a experi ments where rusting of iron is considered as anelectro chemical change. • The process of rusting of Iron could be explained by the following reactions. Fe(s) Fe2+(aq) + 2e 2H2O (l) + O2 (g) + 4e 4(OH)- (aq) Fe(OH)2 (aq) + O2(g) Fe2O3.H2O(s) • Iron rust is a hydrate Ferric oxide, having a reddish brown color, a number of water molecules in it vary. As such the compound is indicated as follows. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Fe2O3.xH2O(s) (45 mts.) Criteria for assesment and evalution • Explain anodic protection and cathodic protection which prevents rusting of Iron. • Appreciate that metallic corrosion could be controlled. • Experiments how metals with different reactivity affect corro- sion of Iron • Arrive at inferences from observation. • Use demostrations as the occasion demands.
  • 88.
    Instruction for groupexploration Annex 3.6.3 • Your group is assigned to study about rusting of Iron nails under one of the following conditions. • When in contact with Mg and when in contact with Sn • When in contact with Al and when in contact with Pb • When in contact with Zn and when in contact with Cu • prepair a set up to investigate the rusting of Iron nails when the two metals are kept in a jelly medium (Prearation of a jelly medium is given below) • Device a suitable control experiment. Petri dish Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. 43210987654321 43210987654321 43210987654321 43210987654321 Iron nail 43210987654321 43210987654321 43210987654321 43210987654321 Metal piece Jelly medium • Forecast what observations you expect to get after one day. • Take down your observation on the following day. • Arrive at conclutions about rusting of Iron, considering the place occupied by the metals subjected to the experiment. • discuss why it is necessary to use a jelly medium instead of an aquaious solution, and the jelly medium should not be allowed to have air bubbles. • Explain the following phenomena scientifically basing your conclusion. • when an Iron bucket coated with Zn (Galvanized) gets scrached rusting is controlled and could be used for a long time. • When food container made of Iron sheet and coated with Sn get scrached it undergoes rusting very rapidly.
  • 89.
    How to preparethe jelly medium Dissolve a small quantity of NaCl in 250 cm3 of water, add 5g of Agar and while stirring well boil for about 10 mts. Once the mixture is viscous add 2 cm3 of phenolphthalein, take away the beaker from the burner stir and when it is some what cool add 1 cm3 of Potacium ferricyanide and stir further. Before it gets solidified add to petri dishes with Iron nails and allowed to cool. (See that air bubbles do not get into the jelly). It ispossible to use poedered sago instead of jelly. Annex 3.6.2 Instrution for preparation of work stations. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. • Keep the following materials and prepare 4 work stations. • work station - 1 - Three Iron nails (7 cm) , sand paper, 3 petri dishes, Mg and Sn metal strips 1 piece (size 0.5 cm x 5 cm) • work station - 2 - Three Iron nails (7 cm), sand paper, 3 petri dishes, Al and Pb metal strips 1 piece (size 0.5 cm x 5 cm) • work station - 3 - Three Iron nails (7 cm), sand paper, 3 petri dishes, Zn and Cu metal strips 1 piece (size 0.5 cm x 5 cm) • Keep at each work station materials required to prepare a jelly medium.
  • 90.
    Competency 3.0 : Use chemical changes suitably to fulfil necessities of life Comptency level 3.7 : Control burning as appropriate to the occasion Activity 3.7 : Let us look, find out about burning Time : 120 mts. Quality inputs : • Three lengh wise folded half sheet papers, so that they are easily ignited. • Three copies of instrutions for exploration article given in annex 3.7.1 Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. • Three work stations arranged according to the instructions given in annex 3.7.2 • Demy paper and pastel Teaching learning Process : Step 3.7.1 • Ignite one of the lengh wise folded papers and cut just below the flame so that the flame is extinguished. • Moistened the second paper up to two third of it with coloured water. Ignite the paper at the dry end and display it to the students. • With the third paper leave the ignited end on a sheet and cover it with an empty jam bottle, allow it to extinguish. • Lead a discussion highlighting the following points. • The flame extinguished as a result of the burning paper being cut and removed ( combustible subtance isremoved) • The flame extinguished as a result of the moistend part of the paper did not reach the temperature required (Ignition temperature) for it to burn. • By covering with the jam bottle the supporter of combus- tion (Oxygen) was prevented from reaching the burning subtance. • Three factors essential for conbustion are availability of a combustible subtance, it should reach the ignition tempera- ture and the gas which is the supportes of combustion. • A chemical reaction where a combutible subtance react with a gaseous supporter of combustion liberating heat and light is called combustiion. • During combustion, the carbon and hydrogen in the com bustible react with Oxygen in the air forming the products of combustion. • Paper is manufactured by plant materials which basically contains carbon and hydrogen.
  • 91.
    • During combustionwhich carbon react with Oxygen, CO2 is formed and when Oxygen react with hydrogen H2O is formed. (15 mts.) Step 3.7.2 : • Devide the class into three groups • Provide the groups with instrutions for exploration, demy paper and pastal • Assign the tasks and engage groups in exploration. • Preparee them to present their findings to the whole class. (60 mts.) Step 3.7.3 : • Get groups to present their findings to the class. • Give the first oppotunity for elaboration to the respective group which made the presentation. • Get other groups to propose construtive suggestions. • Summerize highlighting the following points. • when a candle is burnin, the solid wax melt and it travels upwards along the wick and gets evaporated. This wax vapour gets dissociate due to heat and these react with the supporters of combustion in the surrounding air and pro- duce light and heat. • In the candle flame there are three zones, which could be observed clearly. • The inner most zone in the non-luminous zone, it contains a mixture of wax vapour and air. • The temperature in the non-luminous flame is low, when compared to the other zones. • The zone outside the non-luminous zone is the luminous zone, here the wax gets dissociated and Carbon monoxide and Hydrogen gas are produced and start to form Carbon dioxide and water. • The tenperature in this zon is higher than the temperature in the non-luminous zone. • In the luminous zone, the gases containing Carbon gets dissociated forming free Carbon particals. • The Carbon particals get into the incandescent state and produce the endemic yellow colour of the luminous zone giving out light. • The zone outside the luminous zone, at the base of the flame a blue colour is clearly visible, but at the top it is invisible. In this invisible zone the remaining Carbon monoxide and Hydrogen burn. • In the Kerosene lamp flame,two clearly visible zones, the non-luminous and the luminous are seen.
  • 92.
    • In thewine spirit flame, luminous flame is not visible. • In the bunsen burner flame, inner most is the non-luminous zone and outer to that the dark blue and light blue zones in sequence and outer most is the invisible zone. • In the bunsen burner at the base the combustible subtance is made to mix with air and then it is allowed to burn at the top. • A combustion reaction in which when there is a supply of required quantity of Oxigen, the combustion substance Carbon is completly changed to Carbon dioxide. It is called complete combustion. • A combustion reaction in which when there is a limited Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. supply of Oxigen, part of the Carbon in the combustible subtance is converted to Carbon monoxide, it is called parcial combustion. • In the bunsen burner there is a supply of required quantity of Oxigen, the fuel undergo complte combustion. • Apart from three types considered earlier, a flame of a higher could be got from the bunsen burner. • When combustion takes place in a limited supply of Oxigen the unburnt Carbon particals are given out from the flame, which could be detected as soot by holding a ceremic brick above the flame. • When you hold a wire mesh transversely acroos the flame, due to the absorption of heat by the wire mesh the flame is not seen above the wire mesh for sometime. • When yoy hold a glass sheet across the flame in the patch that forms at the centre unburnt fuel is deposited. • When you hold a fine metal piece to the outer most zone of the flame, there is a reduction in temperature and as a result there is partial combustion and turns luminous for a short time. • When you bring a flame to the vapour of an extinguished flame soon after it was extinguished, the vapour catches fire. • In ovens where there are methods to control the supply of Oxigen and fuel, it possible to obtain a flame which shows complete combustion, with no soot but producing a higher quantity of heat. • When products of combustion are sent through anhydrous Cpper sulphate there is a blue colouration which confirms that there is production of water vapour during combustion. • when the products are sent through lime water, the milki ness shown confirms the production of Carbon dioxide during combustion. (45 mts.)
  • 93.
    Criteria for assesmentand evaluation • Name the zones in the candle flame and explain their nature. • Appreciates that combustion could be controlled depending on its requirment. • Observe the nature of a flame by simple experiment. • Explane observations scientifically. • Shows interest in the protection of one’s self, the others and the environment. Instructions for group exploration • Your group is entrusted to find the nature of one of the flames. • Flame of oil lamp. • Flame of spirit lamp. • Flame of Kerosene lamp. • See whether the zones visible in the candle flame and in the bunsen flame are visible in the flame provided to you. • Engage in the following activities using the flame provided to you. • Holding a piece of ceremic brick to the flame horrizontally above the flame for about 10 seconds. • Holding a wire mesh horrizontally across the flame. • Holding a glass slide horrizontally for about 2 sec. across the flame. • Introduce to the thin colourless outr zone of the flame the end of a thin wire. • Extinguish the flame and immediately hold the flame of an ignited splinter close to the wick. • Find the time required for 20 cm3 of water in a boiling tube to boil. • Compare the nature of the flame provided to you with the flames of firewood hearth, Kerosene oil cooker and a gas oven. • In the instances given above the fundermentel components elements present in the fuel are Carbon and Hydrogen. The following set up is provided to you to undestand about the products of combustion in the flame.
  • 94.
    • Discuss inthe group the equipment to be used, procedure to be adopted and observation expected. • Be prepared to present your findings to the class. Annex 3.7.2 Instrution setting up work station • Keep the following materials and set up three work stations. • Piece of ceremic brick • Copper wire guage • Glass slide Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. • Piece of wire 20 cm long. • Box of matches • Candle stick • In the above work stations, in the first keep coconut oil lamp in the second spirit lamp, in th third Kerosene oil lamp. • Display a burning bunsen burner for all the students in the class to observe.
  • 95.
    Competency 3.0 : Use chemical changes suitably to fullfill necessities of life Competency Level 3.8 :Shows awareness in extinguished fires Activity 3.8 : Prevent fire accidents' Time :120 mts' Quality inputs :• Incident on ,"Hoe fire became a foe to me" in annex 3.8.1 • Three cop[ies of instructions for group exploration given in annex 3.8.2 • Instruction for arrangement of work stations given in annex 3.8.3 Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. • Artical in annex 3.8.4 on " Let us not fall prey to fire" • Demy and pastals Teaching- learning process : Step 3.8.1 : • Get a student to precent the incident to class. • Lead a discussion highlighting the following points. • The possibility of causing fires due to unprotected bottle lamps. • It is possible for accidental fires to cause deaths or bodily problems for life times. • When a person who had caught fire to his cloths run, the supply of Oxygen is better and as a result could develop further. • When clothes catch fire , it is possible to controll the fire by wrapping the body with a gunny bag or a thick clothe. • Fire gets extinguished when one or more factors shown by the fire trangle are removed. at O He xy - Fuel (15 mts) 94
  • 96.
    Step 3.8.2 • Divide the class into three groups. • Provide the groups with exploration instructions , the artical, demy paper and pastel. • Assign the tasks and engage the groups on exploration. • Prepair them to present their findings to the class. (60 mts) Step 3.8.3 • Get the groups to present their findings to the class. • Give the first opportunity to the respective group to eleborate on the presentation. • Get other groups to prepare constructive suggestion. • Summarize highlighting the following points. • Fiires are grouped as follows in order to make it easy to Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. select the the correct fire extinguisher for the respective fire. • A grade fires - Fires associated with Carbonic compounds like wood, clothes, paper etc. • B grade fires - Liquids with highly inflammable like petrolium products, paints, wax, copra, plastic, polithene and grease etc. • C grade fires - All gasses which are inflammable, like acetylene, L.P. gas, propane, butane etc. • D grade fires - Fires from metals like Sodium, Potassium Magnesium etc. • It is possioble to use water fire extinguisher for A grade fires. • Soda - Acid fore extinguisher for A grade fires. • Foam fire extinguisher could be used for B grade fires. • Carbon dioxide fire extinguisher especially suitable for B and C rate fires, and when required for A grade fires. • Halon fire extinguisher could be used for all grades of fires. • Especially for D grade fires and sometimes for C grade fires ( Dry powder ) fire extinguisher could be used. • Water or foam fire extinguisher are not suitable for fires which has a electricity leakage or where there is a possibility of an electricity leakage. • The supply of electricity must be disconnected before any attemp is made to extinguish a fire where there is an electricity leakage or where there is a possibility of an electricity leakage. • In the experimental fire extinguisher water with Carbon dioxide under pressure comes out of the fire extinguisher where Sodium bicarbonate and dilute Sulphuric acid reaction is used. • In the experimental fire extinguisher where Sodium bicarbonte and Aluminium sulphate reaction is used, the foam comes out under pressure. • In the experimental water fire extinguisher a jet of water under pressure comes out. (45 mts) 95
  • 97.
    Critaria for assesmentsand evalution. • Explane types of fires, instructions for extinguishing fires, instance where there suuitable for use. • Appreciates the fact that the fire extingusher must be chosen depending on the type of fire. • Construct a simple working model of a fire extinguisher. • Shows a tendency to protect from accidents. • Learn from experiances of others. Annex 3.8.1 How fire became a foe to me I am Acvhala. From my small days I had the habit of getting up early in the morning and helping mother. As we did not have electricity in our house we used bottle lamps. On this unfor- tunate day too I got up in the morning lighted the oil lamp. When I was going to the kitchen to ignite the hearth the bottle lamp fell erom my hand. The kerosene oil get smeared and the flame extended. Mt clothes caught fire. When I was shoutiung and running about the flae increased further. Fortunately I fell down. Mother came running and wrapped me with a gunny bag. Al- though the flames extinguished I was unconseious. I regained consciousses at the hospital. My hands, legs and face were burn. When I recovered I was left with a folded skin and some big scars. Whenever I see them it gave me a great pain. I related this story to you, young sisters and brothers, to redused my pain and also to tell you about how important it is to protect yourself from fires. Annex 3.8.2 Instruction for group exploration • Draw your attention to the incident assigned to you from the following. • To extinguish of small fire in the stationery stores of the office using the Soda Acid fire extinguisher. • Extinguishing a spreading fire in a fuel filling stations using a foam fire extinguisher. • To controle a fire in carpentry shop using water fire extinguisher. • Disscus the principal of the allocated fire extinguisher and also how the fire is extinguished. • Arrange the set up of the fire extinguisher allocated to you by using the instruments and the materials provided in work stations. • Be prepared to present to thre class about the activity of the fire extinguisher you set up and your findings you discover. 96
  • 98.
    Annex 3.8.3 Instruction for setting work stations Work station - I Bottle with a large mouth and a stopper to fit with a single hole Small bottle without a lid A delivery tube bend in shape L, with a jet at the end of it to fit the hole in the stopper Dilute sulphuric acid Consentrade solution of Sodiuim bicarbonate Clay pot to burn a fire Box of matches Pieces of paper fit to burn Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Piece of jute thread The diagram Dilute Sulphuric Acid Sodium bicarbonete solution Work station - II Bottle with a large mouth and a stopper to fit with a single hole Small bottle without a lid A delivery tube bend in shape L, with a jet at the end of it to fit the hole in the stopper Solution of Aluminium sulphate Solution of Sodium bicarbonate Clay pot to burn a fire Box of matches Small quantity of kerosene oil to burn Piece of thread The diagram Aluminium sulpahte solution Sodium bicarbonete solution 97
  • 99.
    Worl station -III One inch PVC pipe about 25 cm A lid or endcap to close the end 3/4 inch wooden handle slightly longer than 25 cm Bottom of an old slipper Sharp knife Some PVC gum One inch Iron nail Small hammer A clay pot to burn a fire Box of matches Wood which ignite easily Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. The diagram Annex 3.8.4 " Let us not fall prey to fire" Fire is very essential to man but also it is distructive. Three conditions are necessary for fire to burn. There are , a combustible subtance, heat energy required for it to burn and Oxygen. When a fire is destructive it must immediatly extinguished. For this one or more factors given about must be removed. Fire extinguishers are manufactured for this. All fires cannot be extin- guished from a single fire extinguisher. Because of this in order to select the best fire extinguisher the fires are grouped. A - grade fires This includes fires caused by materials with contains carbonic compounds like wood, cloths, paper etc. B -grade fires This includes fires caused by materials which are highly imflammable liquids, or liquids petrolium products, paints, wax, copra, plastic, polythene, grease etc. C - grade fires This includes fires caused by all inflammeble gasses like Acetylene, LP gas, Propane, Butane etc. D - grade fires This includes fires caused by metals like Sodium, Potassium, Magnesium etc. 98
  • 100.
    Water fire extinguisheris used in the case of A - grade fires. A large quatity of water is blown to and it behaves as an artificial rain and falls on the whole burning systems. As a result of the water absorbing heat from the combustible subtaince the fire is extinguished. For small scale fires manually controlled water fire extinguishers are used. In these water is kept at very high pressure using Carbon dioxide or Nitrogen. Soda - Acid fire extinguisher can be used to extinguish A - grade fires. It is arrange in a way that the Sodium bicarbonate and dilute Sulphuric acid are kept in seperate cylinders. When these two subtances get mixed water and Corbon dioxide are forced out at high pressure. As a result of Carbon dioxide the fire is prevented from gettin the gas which supports combustion. Foam fire extinguisher is especialy designed to extinguished B - grade fires. In the foam fire extinguisher thre is artificially prepared foam. When foam at high pressure falls on oil it floates Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. and prevent the combustible suntance coming in contact with the supporter of combution Oxy- gen. Carbon dioxide fire extinguisher is manufactured by storing liquid Carbon dioxide at high pressure. In case of a fire the liquid Carbon dioxide is directed on to the fire. By useing this fire extinguisher A,B and C grde fires could be extinguished. When using this fire extinguisher it must be used in such way to prevent accidents to the person who is using the equipment and the people who are in the fire from inhale Carbon dioxide gas. Halon fire extinguisher is good to extinguished all fires. It has Nitrogen gas mixed with Halon and liquified. This gas cool the combustible substaince , and the suppoter of combution is pre- vented from reaching it. A special significance of this fire extinguisher ther is no left over of anything given out from the extinguisher. Dry fire extinguisher the chemicals subtance used in this are Potassium bicarbonate, Sodium bicarbonate, Ammonium phosphate and Ternary Eautetic Chloride powder. In this case when the dry powder is directed to the fire the chemical reaction in the flame stops, prevent the com- bustible subtance from reaching the ignation temperature. The superter of combution is pre- vented from coming into contact with the combustible subtance, the flame is extinguished. The fire extinguisher is specially suitable for D grade fires and sometimes for C grade fires. 99
  • 101.
    Competency 3.0 : Use of chemical changes suitable to fulfil necessities of life Competency level 3.9 : Produce a gas - Examine its properties. Time : 120 mts. Quality inputs : • A baloon filled with H2 gas, according to instructions given in annex 3.9.1. and an empty baloon. • Three copies of article on instructions for exploration given in annex 3.9.2 • Work stations arranged accordind to instructions given in Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. annex 3.9.3 • Demy papers and pastel Teaching learning process : Step 3.9.1 : • Take the baloon filled with H2 gas, to the class. (do not mention that it contains H2 gas) • Give the other baloon to a student and instruct him to blow into it so that it is of the same size as the H2 filled baloon and tie it. • Let the students predict as to what would happen when the two baloons are released from hand, direct them to observe. • Lead a discussion highlighting the following points. • Both baloons contain the same volume of gas. • One baloon contain H2 gas. • The other baloon has expired air. • H2 gas is less dense than normal air, as a result the baloon went up. • Expired air is more dense than normal air, as a result the baloon went down. • Different gases have different physical and chemical properties. (15 mts) Step 3.9.2 : • Devide the class into three groups. • Provide the groups with instrutions for exploration, demy and pastal. • Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration. • Prepare them to present their findings to the class. (60 mts.)
  • 102.
    Step 3.9.3 : • Get the groups to present their findings to the class. • Give the first oppotunity to the respective groups to elaborate on their presentation • Get the other groups to propose contructive suggestions. • Summerize highlighting the following points • H2 gas has the following properties. • Colourless • No smell • Lighter than air • Slightly soluble in water • Doesnot change the colour of moist litmus paper • Burn with a ‘pop’ sound when a burning splinter is introduced Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. • No colour change with lime water • It is possible to indicate the chemical reaction between Zn and dilute HCl by the chemical equatiion given below. Zn(s) + 2HCl(aq) ZnCl2 + H2(g) •O2 gas has the following properties. •Colourless •No smell •Heavier than air •Slightly soluble in water. •Doesnot change the colour of moist litmus paper. •when a glowing splinter is introduced it burns rapidly. (suporter of combustion) • No colour change with lime water. • The production of O2 gas by the dissociation of H2O2 by MnO2 is given by the chmical equation given below. H2O2(aq) 2H2O(l) + O2(g) • CO2 gas has the following propeties. • Colourless • No smell • Heavier than air • Slightly soluble in water • Moist blue litmus paper turns pink • Extinguish a glowing spliter • Turns lime water milky ( when more gas is bubbled through the solution become colourless) • The chemical reaction which produce CO2 by reacting CaCO3 with dilute HCl is given by the equation given below. CaCO3(s) + 2HCl(aq) CaCl2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(l) (60 mts.)
  • 103.
    Criteria for assesmentand evaluation • State the properties of O2, H2 and CO2 gases. • Appreciates that gases have varying properties. • Tests the properties of gases. • Prepare a set up illustrated by a diagram • confirms identity by properties. Annex 3.9.1 Getting a baloon filled with H2 Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Baloon with H2 Tub Bottle NaOH solution o Water o o o Pieces of Aluminium Annex 3.9.2 Instrutions for group exploration • Your group is assigned to produce one of the gases given below and find its’ physical and chemical properties. • Oxygen gas • Hydrogen gas • Carbon dioxide gas • Using the materials placed in the respective workstations, instruments and the diagram prepare a set up to produce the gas assigned to you. • Conduct the following tests to understand the properties of the gas. • Introduce into the gas a glowing splinter with the flame extinguished and a glowing splinter with the flame. • Hold to the gas moistened blue and red litmus papers. • Bubbling the gas throuh lime water. • State your observation in each of the instances. • Arrive at conclusions about the properties of the gas from your observations. •Be prepared to present your findings to the class.
  • 104.
    Annex 3.9.3 Instructions to set up work stations • Prepare three workstations and provide with materials necessary to set up an experiment as given in the illustration below. Delivery tube Thistle funnel Gas jar Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Conical flask Trough Beehive shelf Water • Provide each workstation with a illustration of the experiment, two test tubes, lime water, Red and Blue litmus papers, splinters and box of matches. Work station - 01 • MnO2 • H2O 2 Mno2 • 2H2O2 (aq) 2H2O(l) + O2(g) (In a display board) Work station - 02 • Zn turnings • Dilute HCl acid • Zn(s) + 2HCl(aq) ZnCl2(aq) + H2(g) (in a display board)
  • 105.
    Work station -03 • CaCO3 • Dilute HCl acid • CaCO3(s) + 2HCl(aq) CaCl2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(l) (In a display board) Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved.
  • 106.
    Competency 3.0 : Use chemicals reaction appropriately to fulfil requirments in life. Competency level 3.10: Investigates experimentally changes in heat associated with chemical reactions. Activity 3.10 : Let study the changes in heat associated with chemical changes. Time : 120 mts. Quality input : • Two test tubes, two glass rods, 2g each of Glucose and Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Sodium hydroxide • Four work stations arranged according to the instrutions given in annex 3.10.1 • four copies of instrutions for exploration given in annex 3.10.2 • Demy papers and pastel Teaching - learning process : Step 3.10.1 : • Get two students in front of the class and give a test tube with water and a glass rod to each. • Provide one student with some Sodium hydroxide and the other some Glucose and allow them to dissolve them in the water and instruct them to report to the class any observations about change in temperature. • Conduct a discussion highlighting the following. • Temperature of the solution increased when Sodium hy droxide was dissolved in water. • Temperarure of the solution decreased when Glucose was dissolved in water. • Change of heat ia associated with chemical changes. • It is possible to calculate the change in heat by using change in temperature of the solution. • If the change in temperature is q , mass of the solution in m the specific heat capacity c , the heat change is Q is expressed by the equation, Q = mcq • The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 kJ0C-1kg-1 • Mass of 1 cm3 of water is 1 g, (15 mts.)
  • 107.
    Step 3.10.2 : • Devide the class into four groups • Provide the groups with instrutions for exploration, demy paper and pastel • Assign the tasks and engage groups in exploration. • Prepare the groups for whole class presentation. (60 mts.) Step 3.10.3 : • Get the groups to present their findings to the class. • Give the first oppotunity for elaboration to the respective group which made the presentation. • Get the other groups propose construtive suggestions. • Summerize highlighting the following points. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. • If heat is given out during a chemical reaction the tempera- ture of the reacting mixture increase. • Reaction which liberate heat during reactions are exother- mic reactions. • If heat is absorbed during a chemical reaction the tempera ture of the reacting mixture decrease. • Reactions which absorb heat during areaction are endother- mic reactions. • In an exothermic reaction, the energy in the product is less than that of the reactants. • In an endothermic reaction the energy in the products is more than more than that of the reactants. • It is important to use quatities of reactanta which show practically measurable temperature difference. • In this experiment we hypothesize that, • The entire quantity of heat associated with the reaction was used to change the temperature of the reacting mixure. • Heat capacity of solutions is equal to the heat capacity of water. • The density of the solution is equal to the density of water. • Change of heat calculated in a reaction, change with the physical nature of the product and reactants. • Therefore when change of heat associated with a reaction is stated it is necessary to indicate the physical state of reac- tants and products. • To observe a maximum change in temperature the loss of heat to the enviroment must be minimized.
  • 108.
    • Loss ofheat could be minimized by conducting the experi ment in an insulated vessel. • To allow the reactants to mix well, the mixture should be stirred with a stirrer/glass rod. (45 mts.) Criteria for assesment and evaluation • Explane with examples, exothermic and endothermic reactions. • Appreciates that there ia an exchange of heat associated with chemical reactions. • Determine experimentally the heat change associated with chemical reactions. • Reach conclusions based on hypothesis. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. • Investigates the accuracy of conclusions. Annex 3.10.1 Instructions to prepare work stations • Have the following set of materials in all the work stations and also specially mentioned items in the respective work stations • Thermometer • Measuring cylinder • 100 cm3 beaker • Stirrer or glass rod. Work station - 01 • 50 cm3 of HCl solution (add 8 cm3 of concentrated HCl up to 50 cm3 of water) • NaOH pellets 1g Work station - 02 • 50 cm3 of CuSO4 solution (dissolve 5 g of CuSO4 salt in 50 cm3 of water) • Fe powder 1 g Work station - 03 • 50 cm3 of H2SO4 ( add 3 cm3 of conc. H2SO4 to 47 cm3 of water) • Clean Mg pieces 0.5 g Work station - 04 • NaHCO3 2g • Citric acid about 50 cm3 (dissolve 5g of Citric acid in 50 cm3 of water)
  • 109.
    Annex 3.10.2 Instructions for group exploration • Draw your attention to the following chemical reactions assigned to your group • NaOH(s) + HCl(aq) NaCl(aq) + H2O(l) • CuSO4(aq) + Zn(s) ZnSO4(aq) + Cu(s) • H2SO4(aq) + Mg(s) MgSO4(aq) + H2(g) • NaHCO3(s) + Citric acid (aq) Sodium citrate (aq)+ CO2 (g) + H2O(l) • Go to your work station and device an experiment to conduct the allocated reaction to Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. determine the heat change. • When handling chemical subtances be careful about the dameges to you and the others. • Calculate the change of heat associated with a molecular mass of the solid state reactant used. H=1 Na = 23 Cl = 35.5 C = 12 Mg = 24 Zn = 65 O = 16 S = 32 Cu = 63.5 • Discuss about the following points. • Errors in the experiment. • How to minimize errors. • Hypothesis used in calculations. • Be prepared for a presentation of your findings to the class.
  • 110.
    Competency 3.0 :Use chemical changes in an appropriate way to fulfil living requirments. Competency level 3.11 :Investigates how weathering of rocks help in the formation of soil Activity 3.11 :Let us Investigates how weathering of rocks help in the formation of soil Time : 120 minutes Quality inputs : • Small pieces of granite,quartz,limestone,mica • Three copies of instructions for exploration given in Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. annex 3.11.1 • Three copies of the article"Earth and rocks" • Demy papers and pastels Teaching-learning process : Step 3.11.1 : • Small pieces of granite/quartz,limestone and mica are distributed among the students and directed to observe them. ² Inquire from the students how the substances provided as well as similar substances are subjected to change Conduct a discussion to highlight the following points. That, ² According to observations ,in the piece of granite there are black coloured and shining components are included in different quantities. ² The piece of granite is a heterogeneous mixture. ² According to observations quartz,limestone and mica pieces shows homogeneous nature. ² A mineral is a crystalline non carbonic substance which is homogeneous and having a definite geometric shape and a definite compossition. ² A heterogeneous solid mixture without a definite compossition and a geometric shape and made up of a number of minerals is called a rock. ² Due to physical,chemical and biological activities minerals and rockes change into different types. (15 minutes)
  • 111.
    Step 3.11.2 ( ² Divide the class into three groups. ² Provide the groups with instruction for exploration the article,demy papers and pastel. ² Assign the tasks and engage the groups in exploration. ² Prepare them to present their findings to the whole class. (60 minutes) Step 3.11.3 ( ² Get each group to present their findings to the class. ² Give the first opportunity to the respective group to elaborate on the presentation. ² Get the other groups to propose constructive sugges tions, Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² Elaborate highlighting the following points. That, ² It is possible to distinguish three types of rocks, igneous,Sedimentary and metamorphic rockes. ² Igneous rocks are formed from cooling magma coming from the interior of theEarth. Eg. Basalt. ² Magma coming to the surface of the earth from empting volcanoes is subjected to rapid cooling ,forms igneous rocks,which are made up of small crystals. Eg. Granite ² Magma which cools slowly inside the earth forms igneous rocks with big crystals. ² Igneous rocks are very hard and there is indication to show that they are deposited as layer or grains. ² Weathering of hard rocks result in mineral and carbonic substances which are deposited as layers at the bottom of reservoirs. ² When sedemented layers at the bottom are subjected to pressure from layers above,Sedimentary rocks are formed. Eg. Mudstone,Conglomerate ² The Sedimentary rocks are not as hard as igneous rocks. Eg.Limestone
  • 112.
    • When igneousand sedimentary rocks are subjected to temperature,pressure and movement of the surface of the earth,their nature changes and form metamorphic rocks. Eg Marble,slate • Nature of Metamorphic rocks differs according to the original rock from which it was formed. • Breaking down of rocks expossed on the surface of the earth into small parts due to physical,chemical and biological factors is called Weatherning of rocks. • Rocks are subjected to physical Weatherning due to Sun,rain,wind and ice. • Chemical Weatherning of rocks is when a rock is subjected to a chemical change where compounds in it are changed to simple compounds. • Due to some activities of living beings on rocks,both physical and chemical weatherning takes place. • Soil is formed when sand and clay formed from Weatherning of rocks combine with Organic matter from plants and animals. • Formation of rocks,and they under go weatherning and form soil ,occur as a cycle in nature. • Rocks in earth undergo changes from one from to another in a cyclic movement. (45 mts) Criteria for assessment and Evaluation ² Explain how soil is formed from weatherning of rocks. ²Appreciates that rocks undergo changes in a cycle. ² Observe diversity in rocks.. ²Collect data from sources. ² Present data in an attractive way.
  • 113.
    Annexe 3.11.1 Instructions for group exploration ²Your group is assigned to investigate how one type of rock is formed and how one factor help in the weathering of rocks. • Types of rocks according • Factors help in to how it is formed weatherning of rocks • Igneous rocks • Chemical factors • Metamorphic rocks • Physical factors • Sedmentary rocks • Human and other biological factors Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² Discuss in the group about the type of rock you are assigned to you and about the factor that help in the weathering of rock. ² Be prepared for a creative presentation of your findings. Annexe 3.11.2 Earth and Rocks The day for which Anil,Upul and Namal were eagerly waiting for arrived. the three showed a keen interest for Geology. It was for no other reason but the teacher was able to make the classroom interesting by engaging them in various activities to arouse the interest of the students.The trip was organised to educate them about geological resources. Anil started the discussion by stating that"Man`s curiosity about minerals started from the time he found that implements could be made by stones."But man used pieces of stones to make stone implements.Rocks found nature are stones which are a combination of one or mo Teacher introduced his friend, geology Professor.He spoke to the three students and said, "Our country is full of resources.out of these resources Geological resources occupy an important place.Only a minute fraction of it could be found during this trip." As the vehical was moving he showed a granite rock and said,early man may have made implements from these.The granite rocks they used to make implements belong to the igneous rocks.In Latin `Ignis`means fire.At a depth of more than 30km from the surface of the earth,the rocks get liquietised or fused due to high temperature.This liquid is known as`Magma`When this magma comes to the surface of the earth during volcanic eruptions,it is called `lava`.When this lava gets cooled and solidified igneous rocks are formed.It is possible for this lava to cool inside the earth and form igneous rocks.
  • 114.
    In addition togranite,basalt,rhyolite and obsidian are examples for igneous rocks explained the Professor. At the moment the vehicle was going along a road .which was constructed recently after cutting a hill. The Professor instructed the vehicle to be stopped. Professor said"Let us get down from the vehicle,I will show you something". All of us walked behind the Professor. "Can all of you see clearly the layers deposited in this cross section of the hill.Any rock which is regularly exposed to factors and agents like high heating,high cooling,Sun,Rain,Acid rain breaking up due to water and wind break up into small particles.This process is called weatherning of rocks".These settle as logitudinal layers on the surface of the earth,or at the bottom of resoviors or ocean.These layers are called sediments.If these layers are arranged loosely they occur as gravel,sand on the sea shore and sand dunes,when futher sedimentation on top of these,occur the weight of these layers cause the particles to get tied together and form into rocks.These are called `sedimentary rocks`.Mudstone,Conglomerate and Siltstones are examples for sedimentary rocks.sometime animal bones and dead bodies of micro organ sms with calcareous(calcium carbonate) shells gets deposited for millions of years forms a sedimentary rock.,the limestone.These deposits are seen in the Jaffna peninsula and north of Puttalm,said the teacher,joining the discussion."Does laterite stones (Kabok) belong to the i sedimentary rocks"asked Upul. No.we do not consider it as a sedimentary rock because it has been found that laterite is a product of some type of largely weathered rock which include clay. When this discussion was going on with the Professor important was taken down in the field note book. The group got into the vehocle and restarted the field trip." In Marshy places and in forests with trees, the dead animals and plant materials get collected on the soil. They under go changes and after millions of years forms coal." questioned Anil "Son, you raised a very good question." When dead plant and animal matter which is carbonic matter is added to the soil it is decom- posed by microorganisms. sometimes,soft and brown coloured peat is formed from these carbonic material after a long period. In our country peat is found in Muthurajawela.When peat inside the earth is subjected to pressure by the layers collecting on top of it,and high temperature,coal is formed after is long period of time.Since coal is a carbonic material it is not grouped under as either a mineral or rock.But some scientists include coal as carbonic rocks under sedimentary rocks.This Process occur in lakes,resoriviors or marshy or Brakish water having environments explained the professor. Then upul asked that in addition to igneous rocks and Sedimentary rocks,their is metamorphic rocks. The high temperature and pressure inside the core of the earth or movement of the earths` crust or chemical action with other substances and gases rocks undergo changes.
  • 115.
    As a resultof this rocks become metamorphic rocks,explained the teacher. During these change,the mineral composition or the texture(what you see on the surface and what you feel when you touch it with your hand) of the rock or both could change.For ex- ample when limestone gets metamorphed it changes to marble said the Professor. Further examples of this are greiss,slate, and quartzite.As namal said at the begining,any type of rock turns to liquid magma at the core of the earth.where the temperature is about 6600C. That is correct,as magma inside the earth comes to the surface,it is called lava.Igneous rocks are formed from magma or lava. When we look at rocks this way I feel that there is cyclic movement among rock types. "I wanted to explain this fact.Any type of rock on the surface of the earth undergo weathring gets deposited as layers and form sedimentary rocks.Similarly rocks into metamorphic rocks due high temperature,pressure and various chemical changes.The rocks in the core of the earth gets liquified or fused and form magma and in the end form igneous rocks.In this way igneous Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. rocks,Sedimentary rocks,and metamorphic rocks changes from one to the other in a cycle. This is called the rock cycle said the Professor. Heard in another place. This is the containing rocks.In each of these cubicles there is a different type of rock,give the piece of rock named granite.This is not granite,it is different.This was brought from Scotland.It is dark in colour.Its` crystals are very fine.When lava gets cooled suddenly this high quality granite is formed. How about granite in our Country? According to the data discovered by Scientists there is no pure granite in Sri Lanka. But their are ancient stone pillars which are thousands of years old,we see them as if they were built today. Let me see the facts you wrote?The Professor started to read what they had written. Ah.Here is the section written about weathering of rocks. `yes` Very good.Children this is the challange I give you.By refering to different resource material construct an article on"the different ways of weathering of rocks".I give you two weeks from today.There is a Valuable present for the best article and it would be published in the Magazine.
  • 116.
    Identify the charactorsof following rocks Sedimental rocks Eg. Sandtone Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Metamorphic rocks Eg. Schist Igneous rocks Eg. Granite
  • 117.
    T The three friends collected data from various electronic and printed media in addition to facts collected during the trip.not only that,they collected data from books written by Srilankan Scientists,and also from compact discs of diffferent encyclopedias and tried to present a resourseful artical. The Artical submitted by Upul got the frist place.It was presented in the following manner. Rocks break up-Soil is formed Rocks,which is earths` heritage regularly changes due to various factors and form soil. This Process is known as weathering of rocks. Physical weatherning of rocks Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. Due to various factors the rocks on the surface of the earth break up into small parts which is physical weathering.Heat of the Sun,water,wind are the factors which cause physical weathering. a) Exporsure of rock to sunlight The top layers of the rocks exposed to sunlight gets dried up.This is due to Sun`s heat.During rain it gets wet.The volume of the rock increase when it is hot and decrease when it is cold.When this process is repeated there is weathering of the rock. wõfjkqhs jeiafikqhs ug yß u lrorhs Example.Shalka gal is a sedimentary rock. It is formed by layers arranging one on top of the other.These get regularly dried up and wet,they undergo weathering,as a result the layers of the rock break up and ultimately from small partices. b) Rocks dissolve in water When rocks come in contact with water,some minerals in it gets dissolved.As a result the structure of the rock gets weak.Because of this the rock breaks up. When carbon dioxide is dissolved in water it is acidic,this cause weathering to take place faster.
  • 118.
    c)Heating and coolingof rockes Rocks are exposed to Sun during daytime.They undergo expansion due to Sun`s heat.At night the rocks get coooled and as a result undergo contraction.Rocks made up of a number of different minerals undergo weathering in this manner.Different minerals have different coefficients of expansion.As a result the bonds between minerals in the rock become less.This causes the surface of the rock to crack.This makes it easy for the rock to break up into small parts.Water getting into the cracks is also a cause for weathering. d)Sand brought by winds When there is a heavy wind,the sand in the sea,and the rivers gets carried by it.When these sand particles strike the rock small particles of it break off. e)There is physical weathering due to rock particls striking one another in rivers and canals. The pieces of rocks in rivers and canals become rounded due to parts of it getting removed. f)Rain water could enter into the crackes in the rocks caused by various reasons.During the winter season the water in the crackes turn to ice.The volume of ice is bigger than that of Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. water.As a result the crack gets bigger.This causes the rock to split up.Big rocks spilt up into pieces in this way. Water gets collected When Ice With time in the crackes water the rocks turn to ice breaks up there is crack gets bigger Temperature falls below 0 0 C Due to hot and cold climate big rocks break up into small pieces.
  • 119.
    Chemical weathering ofrocks Rocks undergo chemical weathering due to the effect of various factors on rocks.The chemical substance cause interaction with the rocks.As a result chemical changes occur in the rocks forming simple compounds.Here oxygen,water,and acidic substances behave a agents of weathering.These reacton takes place very slowly. • The oxygen in the air,reacts with minerals which go to form the rock,as a result the rock undergo chemical weathering. For example as result of the iron present in rocks,the rocks undergo Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. weathering. Oxigen in the air cause Iron in the rock to corrode • Formation of new compunds due to the reaction between the rocks and water is called hydration.Hydration too cause weatherning of rocks. • The minerals present in the rocks,sometime undergo hydrolysis.Minerals like Sodium , Potassium,Calcium,Magnesium,Aluminium and Iron undergo hydrolysis. Example:- Hydrolysis of Orthoclas rock yeild Clay. • When Carbondioxide is dissolved in rain water a weak acid is formed.(This is called Cabonization.) This acidic water interacts with minerals in the rock.Here the carbonate of the mineral is formed.This also cause weathering of rocks. Eg:- Limestone is weathered by carbonic acid eventually cavems are formed • In a soil where there there is decay of carbonic material by micro organisms the carbondioxide gas is very high.This is because of the activity of microorganisms on the decaying carbonic material.When this carbondioxide,dissolved in water interacts with minerals in the rocks carbonates of the minerals is formed.This cause the weathering of rocks. • You must have seen white,light green,light blue patches growing on rocks.These patches are symbiotic unions between algae and fungi.They are called Lichens.Secretions emitted by these Lichens cause weathering of rocks. • During Lightening, the nitrogen and oxygen react forming nitric oxide and nitrous oxide.These gases dissolve in rain water nitric acid and nitrous acid are formed.Rain water with these acids dissolved is called acid rain.These acids,when they fall on rocks cause weathering.
  • 120.
    Weathering of rocksby living beings • Living beings,living the same enviroment as the rocks,contribute to the weathering of rocks. When roots of a plant close by grow into a split in a rock caused by physical weatherning the split gets enlarged and the rock is split up.If not,If there is a crevice formed due to chemical weathering which is suitable for plants to grow the roots of the plants increase the split. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. These tree rots have broken of pieces of rocks • Man cause weathering of rocks by breaking then up. • When micro organisms grow on rocks the chemicals they emit cause weatherning of rocks. • The lichens that grow on partially weathered rocks,physically or chemically,cause the weathering of rock. • Some animals which live associated with rocks dig up the soil around the rock.when rain water gets collected in it cause weathering of the rock. Eg:-Animals dig the soil around the rock.The water that is collected in these places cause weathering of the rocks. • When hooves and horns of animals are periodically rubbed or struck against the rocks,the rocks get worn out. • Reactions caused when excretons matter of animals gets collected on rocks,there is weath ering of rocks.
  • 121.
    Rock cycle Igneous IGNEOUS rock is weathered (extrusive) and carried to the sea by revers Igneous (Intrusive) Sea METAMORPHIC Magma SEDIMENTARY rock Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. rock Earth movements Rock is squash and bury melted the layers of sedimentry rock According to the states of cartoon nos. (1),(2) and (3) understand the above rock cycle number (1),(2),(3).
  • 122.
    Tools for ExtendedTeaching - Learning Process 1'0 Evaluation State ( Term 2, Tool 1 2'0 Competancy Levels covered ( 1'1" 1'2" 1'3" 1'4 3'0 Subject content covered ( ² Atom ² Sub Atomic particals ² Model for Atomic structure ² Atomic number ² Mass number ² Isotops Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. ² Electron configuration ² Relative Atomic Mass ² Chemical bonds ² Chemical formula for Molecules ² Relative Molecular Mass ² Avogardro constance ² Mole (as a unit) ² Atomic mole ² Molecular mole ² Molecular mass 4'0 Nature of Instruments ( Presentation of literature survey 5'0 Objectives ( 1' Skill development as a finder of new knowledge 2' To enhance the skills of reporting observations as a scientist. 3 'To involve in analyzing the reported information using various criteria. 6'0 Instructions for implementation ( For teacher ( ² This is valid for second term science syllabus in competency level in 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4 Inform students to litriture survey start of the second term. ² In this tool each student is involve in an individual process. ² Direct the students subject content or part of it to each student as your wish. 117
  • 123.
    ² Inform thestudents in advance the date at which they have to submit the completed litreture survey. ² Provide constructive suggestions once or twice by examine their litreture survey before submition For students ( ² Use litreture review for exploration for activities nos. 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4 relevent to second term in your science syllabus. ² Select to find information relevent to this topic • Magazine Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. • News papers • CD s • Internet ² Be prepair to present information you have collected by utilizing available resources. ² Mention the sources which you get the information finelly in the litreture reveiw. ² Submitt your litreture review to your teacher on due date. 7.0 Format for assessment and evaluation : Name of the student Criteria 1. Keep information accurately 2. Accuracey of information 3. Report reference sources accurately 4. Follows instructions 5. Prsents the litreture review attractively Indicate Proficiency Levels as A,B,C or D A - Excellent B - Good C - Average D - Should Improve 118
  • 124.
    Tools for ExtendedTeaching - Learning Process 1.0 Evaluation : Term 2, Instrument 2 2.0 Competency levels covered : 3.7 and 3.8 3.0 Subject content covered : • Action of furance • Fire extingusher and usage 4.0 Nature of Instrument : Preparation of information leaflet 5.0 Objectives : 1. Awearness of using combustion productivity at day to day life. 2. To improve communication skills through informa Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. tion leaflet. 6.0 Instrutions for implementation : For teachers • Encourage students to make a information leaflet. relevent to " Action of furance and productivity usage"or "fire extinguishers and accurate usage " • Inform student about the source of information. • Get student to refer the inforation leaflet issued by various institutions. For students • Prepair a information leaflet for public reguarding " Action of furance and productivity usage" or "fire extinguishers and accurate usage" • Mark information which you have been collected in infirmation leaflet concise, simple and atractive. • Submit a prepaired infomation leaflet to your teacher on due date. 119
  • 125.
    7.0 Format forassessment and evaluation : Names of Students Criteria Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. • Relevance of information • Presentation skills • Creativity • Reliability of information • Completeness of information Indicate Proficiency Levels as A,B,C or D A - Excellent B - Good C - Average D - Should Improve 120
  • 126.
    Tools for ExtendedTeaching - Learning Process 1.0 Evaluation : Term 2, Instrument 3 2.0 Competency levels covered : 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.9, 3.10 3.0 Subject content covered : • Classification of chemical reaction • Investigate interactions between matter and electricity. • Investigate reaction pattern of pure metals • Examine the rate of the reaction of chemical reac tions. Copyright © 2007 National Institute of Education - Sri Lanka. All rights reserved. • Get the necessary action to prevent metal corrision. • Preparation of gases and examine properties. • Invetigate Heat changes relevent to chemical reactions 4.0 Nature of Instrument : Chemistry practical workshop 5.0 Objectives : 1. To develope practical experiences relevant to various chemical reactions. 2. To enhance maniuplations skills for setting experi- mental appratus. 3. To direct the students on effective communication through creations. 6.0 Instrutions for implementation : For teachers • In this tool each student is involved in an individual process as well as group process. • Divide a class into seven groups and give the relevent practical set. • Provide the necessary facilities for practical test and inform the students in advance the date at which they have to conduct a workshop. • Evaluate the students after the workshop. For students • Present the practical test which is preplaned given by teacher. • Get the chance to present the relevent activity accu rately • Preplanned when the result of experiment is taken several days. • Plan the workshop when result of some experiment is taken several days. 121